Business Process Integration - I - MyWeb
Business Process Integration - I - MyWeb
Business Process Integration - I - MyWeb
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
mySAP<br />
SRM<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
mySAP PLM<br />
mySAP<br />
ERP ECC 6.0<br />
mySAP SCM<br />
SAP NetWeaver<br />
mySAP<br />
CRM<br />
<strong>Business</strong> <strong>Process</strong> <strong>Integration</strong> – I<br />
Exercises<br />
Using the GBI data set<br />
ECC 6.04<br />
Modified by Tom Wilder, May 2011<br />
V1.0<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 1 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Unit 1 not included in this set<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Unit 2: Customer Order Management <strong>Business</strong> Cycle Including<br />
Procurement <strong>Process</strong> for Replenishment of Goods<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 2 is to demonstrate the Customer Order Management <strong>Business</strong> Cycle beginning<br />
with a quotation and ending with recording final payment received from the customer. This process will<br />
include the procurement cycle as you will need to procure the items for sale.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 2 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 1: Logging on to the SAP System<br />
Enter the following:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Select server name provided by the course lead<br />
Click on<br />
Client number provided by course lead<br />
User ID (e.g., User-100) provided by course<br />
lead<br />
Password (e.g., init) provided by course lead<br />
Select EN as the language<br />
(Enter)<br />
Once you have pressed enter, the system will prompt you to change your password the first time you log<br />
on to the system.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 3 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
The following pop-up screen will appear.<br />
Select (Enter)<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Enter your new password<br />
Repeat your new password<br />
This will log you onto the system. The following page is a screen shot of the SAP Easy Access Menu you<br />
should see if you have been successful.<br />
If you cannot get logged on to the system, please notify the course instructor.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 4 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
This is the SAP Easy Access Menu. It is from here that most all of your exercises will begin.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 5 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 2: Create Vendor Master<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code XK01<br />
Enter the following:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Master Data → Vendor →<br />
Central → Create<br />
(Enter)<br />
Title select: Company<br />
Name<br />
Enter the vendor’s name Your last Name Enterprise _ _ _<br />
(Example: Wilder Enterprise 001)<br />
Search term<br />
Search term = _ _ _(Your Student Number)<br />
Address<br />
Postal code = 68516<br />
City = Lincoln<br />
Country = US<br />
Region = NE<br />
Communication<br />
Language = English<br />
Leave vendor field blank<br />
Company code: US00<br />
Purchasing organization: US00<br />
Account Group: KRED<br />
Reference<br />
Vendor: 110000<br />
Company Code: US00<br />
Purch. Organization: US00<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 6 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Then, click on or until you see the Create Vendor: Control screen.<br />
In the Create Vendor: Control screen:<br />
In the Tax information field group enter 12-3456### as Tax Number 2 –<br />
remember to replace ### with your number. Confirm your entry and skip<br />
the next screen (Create Vendor: Payment transactions) by clicking or<br />
twice.<br />
In the Create Vendor: Accounting information Accounting screen:<br />
Enter Recon. Account 300000. Then click on or .<br />
In the Create Vendor: Payment transactions Accounting screen:<br />
Enter Payt Terms 0001, and select Chk double inv. Then click on or<br />
.<br />
In the Create Vendor: Correspondence Accounting screen:<br />
Enter your name as Clerk at vendor. Then click on or .<br />
In the Create Vendor: Purchasing data screen:<br />
Enter USD as Order currency and 0001 for Terms of payment. Then click<br />
on or .<br />
There is no data to be entered in the Create Vendor: Partner functions<br />
screen.<br />
Click on to save your vendor master record. The system will<br />
automatically assign a unique number for your vendor.<br />
Click on the exit icon to return to the SAP Easy Access screen.<br />
Message<br />
Record the<br />
system<br />
message:<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 7 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 3: Create Material Master<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MMH1<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material →<br />
Create (Special) → Trading Goods<br />
In the Industry Sector field, use the drop down to enter “Retail”<br />
**Important! The following steps are done through the system menu, the menu across the top of the<br />
screen. Do not click on the buttons, as they will not give complete information.<br />
System Menu: Defaults → Industry sectors…<br />
(Enter)<br />
Select: Retail<br />
Check Hide industry sector<br />
System Menu: Default→ Views…<br />
Select the views: Basic data 1<br />
Sales: Sales Org. Data 1, Sales: Sales Org. Data 2<br />
Sales: General/Plant Data<br />
Purchasing<br />
MRP 1, MRP 2, MRP 3<br />
General Plant Data/Storage 1<br />
Accounting 1<br />
(Enter)<br />
Make sure these are checked<br />
System Menu: Default→ Organization levels… Copy from…<br />
Select:<br />
Plant: MI00 (Miami) MI00<br />
Sales org: UE00 (US West) UE00<br />
Distribution channel: WH WH<br />
(If a Company Code Field is displayed, enter code for Miami in both locations)<br />
(Enter)<br />
Make sure this is checked<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 8 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
(Enter)<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Material CHLOK1_ _ _<br />
Change Number: Leave Blank<br />
Copy from… leave blank<br />
Basic data 1 TAB<br />
On the Basic Data 1 tab, enter Chain Lock _ _ _ as a description (text field next to the material<br />
number).<br />
As Base Unit of Measure, use the F4 help to find and select each (EA).<br />
In the Material Group field, select UTIL (Utilities).<br />
As division, choose AS (Accessories).<br />
In the Gross Weight field and in the Net Weight field, enter 65 and select Ounce (OZ) as Weight unit.<br />
Then press Enter or click on . (Enter)<br />
Sales: Sales Org. 1 TAB<br />
On the Sales: sales org. 1 tab, in the Delivering Plant field use the F4 help to find and select the Miami<br />
plant (MI00). In the Tax data field group, in the left Tax classification column (the one that is editable =<br />
white background color) select Exempt (0) for all three tax categories.<br />
Select<br />
In the Screen: Create pricing conditions (PR00) Scale<br />
Enter the following:<br />
Scale quantity: 1<br />
Amount: 69.00<br />
On the Sales: sales org. 2 tab, select Matl statistics grp 1. Then press Enter.<br />
On the Sales: General/Plant tab, select Availability check 02 (Individual requirements) and use the F4<br />
help to choose Tansp. Grp 0001 (On pallets) and LoadingGrp 0002 (Handcart).<br />
On the Purchasing tab, enter Purchasing Group N00 (North America).<br />
On the MRP 1 tab, select MRP type PD (MRP), MRP Controller 000, Lot size EX (Lot-for-lot order<br />
quantity) and Minimum Lot Size 10.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 9 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
On the MRP 2 tab, enter<br />
• Planned Deliv. Time 6 (days) and select<br />
• SchedMargin key 001.<br />
• Safety Stock 25.<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
On the MRP 3 tab, check if the Availability check is set correctly to 02. Then, press Enter. Skip the<br />
Plant data / stor. 1 view by clicking on<br />
On the Accounting 1 tab, select Valuation Class 3100 (Trading Goods), enter Moving price 33.50.<br />
Then, click on to save your material.<br />
Click on the exit icon to return to the SAP Easy Access screen.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 10 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 4: Create Customer Master<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code XD01<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
(Enter)<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → <strong>Business</strong> Partner →<br />
Customer → Create → Complete<br />
You will create the following customer:<br />
Account group: Sold-to party<br />
Customer: (Leave blank)<br />
Company code: US00<br />
Sales organization: UE00<br />
Distribution channel: WH<br />
Division: AS<br />
Address TAB<br />
Title: Company<br />
Name: (your last name) _ _ _ example Wilder 001<br />
Search term<br />
Search Term: _ _ _<br />
Address<br />
Street/house number N. Orange / _ _ _<br />
Postal Code: 32804<br />
City: Orlando<br />
Country: US<br />
Region: FL<br />
Communication<br />
Language: English<br />
If Company code US00 shows up in the<br />
reference section, delete it<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 11 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Click on the icon in the Street Address box, then click on the search icon next to the<br />
Transportation Zone field.<br />
Enter Region East.<br />
Select<br />
Account Management TAB<br />
(Financial Accounting)<br />
Rec. Account: 110000<br />
Sort key: 001<br />
Payment transactions TAB<br />
Terms of payment: 0001<br />
Select<br />
Sales TAB<br />
Sales order<br />
Currency: USD<br />
Pricing/statistics<br />
Cust. Pric. Proc.: 1<br />
Cust. Stats. Grp: 1<br />
Shipping TAB<br />
Shipping<br />
Delivery priority: 02<br />
Order Combination: Selected<br />
Shipping Conditions: 01<br />
Delivering Plant: MI00<br />
Partial deliveries<br />
Max.part.deliveries: 3<br />
Billing Document TAB<br />
Delivery and payment terms<br />
Incoterms: FOB, type in the description: Origin Shipping Dock<br />
Terms of Payment: 0001<br />
Accounting<br />
Account Assign Group: 01<br />
Accounting<br />
Tax Classification: 0 for all three categories<br />
<br />
(Save)<br />
Record Customer Number ________________________<br />
(Cancel) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 12 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 5: Create Customer Quotation<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VA21<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Quotation type: QT<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Quotation → Create<br />
Organizational Data<br />
Sales Organization: UE00<br />
Distribution channel: WH<br />
Division: AS<br />
(Enter)<br />
The ‘Item Overview’ screen of the quotation appears.<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Quotation: Leave blank (system assigns number)<br />
Sold-to party: Number from Creating a Customer<br />
Ship-to party: Leave blank<br />
PO number: _ _ _<br />
Item overview Tab<br />
Valid to date: Date = one month ahead of today’s date<br />
Material: CHLOK1_ _ _<br />
Order quantity: 150<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record Quotation Number: ______________________<br />
(Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 13 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 6: Create Sales Order with Reference to a Quotation<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VA01<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create<br />
Order type: OR<br />
Organizational Data<br />
Sales Organization: UE00<br />
Distribution channel: WH<br />
Division: AS<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Note that the system defaults to the Quotation Tab. Enter the number of the quotation created in the<br />
previous exercise. (if you didn’t write it down, use the search icon and your login user name in<br />
the “created by” field to find it.)<br />
Select<br />
Note: If your screen is titled “Standard Order: Availability Control and states that delivery is not<br />
possible, click on the continue icon . Otherwise, follow the directions below<br />
The system copies the details of the quotation into the Sales order.<br />
Select the option that gives you a complete delivery on the proposed date.<br />
Once you are at the Create Standard Order: Overview screen:<br />
PO Number: 123-_ _ _<br />
PO Date: Today’s date<br />
Sales Tab<br />
Delivering plant MI00<br />
(Enter) Enter through any warnings<br />
Record the Net Value of the Sales Order: _____________________<br />
(Save)<br />
Record Order Number: ________________________<br />
(Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 14 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 7: Check Stock Status<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MMBE<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →<br />
Environment → Stock → Stock Overview<br />
Material: CHLOK1_ _ _<br />
Plant: MI00<br />
Display version: 1<br />
(Execute)<br />
Select the Company Code line in the display.<br />
Select<br />
This will open a pop-up window showing the details of the inventory by stock type at the level you<br />
selected.<br />
Check the unrestricted use quantity (Unrestricted use) stock type<br />
Check the sales orders quantity (Sales orders) stock type<br />
Check the delivery quantity (Scheduled for delivery) stock type<br />
Record the storage location and quantity of inventory for each Stock type:<br />
Company Code<br />
Stock Type Stock<br />
Unrestricted Use<br />
Sales Orders<br />
Scheduled for Delivery<br />
(Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 15 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 8: Run Material Requirements Planning – Single Item, Single<br />
Level<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MD03<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management →<br />
Materials Requirements Planning (MRP) → MRP → Planning →<br />
Single-Item, Single-Level<br />
Enter material number: CHLOK1O1_ _ _<br />
Enter plant: MI00<br />
MRP control parameters<br />
<strong>Process</strong>ing key: NETCH<br />
Create pur. req.: 2<br />
Deliv. schedule: 3<br />
Create MRP list: 1<br />
Planning mode: 1<br />
Scheduling: 1<br />
<strong>Process</strong> control parameters<br />
Select Display results before they are saved<br />
(Enter)<br />
A warning message appears - please check input parameters<br />
(Enter) again to confirm and check the warning message<br />
Review the MRP list<br />
Note: Your MRP list may appear different depending on dates and orders.<br />
(Save)<br />
(Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 16 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 9: Convert Purchase Requisition to Purchase Order<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MD04<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management →<br />
Materials Requirements Planning (MRP) → MRP → Evaluations →<br />
Stock/Reqmts List<br />
Individual access Tab<br />
Material: CHLOK1O1_ _ _<br />
Plant: MI00<br />
(Enter)<br />
Select Purchase Requisition to be converted and click (Details of Element)<br />
or Double click on the purchase req to be converted.<br />
Click on the button<br />
Enter Vendor number that you created in exercise 2 (You may have to enter Purch. Org US00 first.)<br />
Enter the number to the right of word vendor<br />
Org. Data Tab<br />
Purch. Org. US00<br />
Purch Group N00<br />
Company Code US00<br />
(Enter)<br />
Single Click on Open Requisitions line in the left window<br />
Then Select (Adopt)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 17 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Enter a Net Price: 32.00<br />
Currency: USD<br />
Increase the PO quantity to: 200<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
(Enter)<br />
You may get a warning message asking if delivery date can be met. Click (Enter) to continue.<br />
Record the amount of the purchase order from the Conditions Tab on the Header $ _____________<br />
(Save)<br />
<br />
Record the new purchase order number._____________________<br />
Select the (Refresh) button to refresh the Stock/Reqmts List<br />
Notice the MRP elements change from the old PurReq to display the new POitem.<br />
(Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 18 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 10: Create Goods Receipt<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MIGO_GR<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →<br />
Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order →<br />
GR for Purchase Order (MIGO)<br />
Enter your PO # 4500000???<br />
(Execute)<br />
(You will notice that the OK check box and SLoc are grayed out. Click on the item detail icon to<br />
minimize the item detail field, thus activating the item overview fields. Or you can use the item detail area<br />
to update the information. Click Item OK at the very bottom and put in the storage location in the Where<br />
tab. In futre exercises, you will have this same issue, however in those exercises you may have more<br />
than one line item. If that is the case, only the line item that is displayed in the item detail section will be<br />
grayed out in the item overview section. )<br />
Ensure each line item OK is checked<br />
Enter storage location TG00<br />
Notice that the quantity from the PO defaults as the quantity to receive.<br />
Select or (Post)<br />
(Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 19 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 11: Create Invoice Receipt from Vendor<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MIRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Logistics Invoice Verification →<br />
Document Entry → Enter Invoice<br />
Basic data Tab<br />
Invoice Date: Today's Date<br />
Check your Company Code: US00<br />
Enter amount: Enter amount from invoice<br />
Tax code: XI<br />
PO number: (Enter your purchase order number – 4500000???)<br />
(Enter)<br />
Use the button to see if the postings are correct.<br />
(Post)<br />
(Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 20 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 12: Post Payment to Vendor<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code F-53<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Document Entry →<br />
Outgoing payment→ Post<br />
Document date: Today<br />
Bank data:<br />
Account: 100000<br />
Amount: Enter the amount of the outgoing payment from invoice<br />
Text: Invoice Number or other text<br />
Open item selection:<br />
Account: Enter your Vendor # (Created in Exercise 2)<br />
All other settings remain unchanged.<br />
Select<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 21 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Review the balance.<br />
(post)<br />
Record the document number ______________________<br />
(Exit)<br />
<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 22 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 13: Create Delivery Note for Sales Order<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VL01N<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →<br />
Outbound Delivery → Create → Single Document →<br />
With Reference to Sales Order<br />
Shipping point: MI00<br />
Sales order data<br />
Selection date: Enter a date 7 days from today<br />
Order: Enter the order number of the sales order created earlier<br />
(Enter)<br />
The system defaults the items and quantities from the sales order that are scheduled to be delivered.<br />
Item Overview Tab<br />
Click on the line item 10<br />
(Item Details)<br />
(Back)<br />
Picking Tab:<br />
Verify system selected:<br />
Plant = MI00<br />
Enter the storage location for each item<br />
SLoc = TG00<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the Outbound Delivery number: _________________<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 23 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 14: Check Stock Status<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →<br />
Environment → Stock → Stock Overview<br />
Database selections<br />
Material: CHLOK1O1_ _ _<br />
Plant: MI00<br />
Display version: 1<br />
(Execute)<br />
Select the plant line in the display.<br />
Select<br />
This will open a pop-up window showing the details of the inventory by stock type at the level you<br />
selected.<br />
Check the unrestricted use quantity (Unrestricted use) stock type<br />
Check the sales orders quantity (Sales orders) stock type<br />
Check the delivery quantity (Scheduled for delivery) stock type<br />
Record the storage location and quantity of inventory for each Stock type:<br />
Plant<br />
Storage Location<br />
Stock Type Stock<br />
Unrestricted Use<br />
Sales Orders<br />
Scheduled for Delivery<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 24 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 15: Picking Materials on Delivery Note<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VL02N<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →<br />
Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Outbound Delivery Outbound delivery number from the previous exercise.<br />
(Enter)<br />
The material delivery quantity is proposed.<br />
Picking Tab<br />
Enter Pick quantity to match the proposed delivery quantity<br />
Verify that the storage location is Inventory<br />
(Save)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 25 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 16: Post Goods Issue<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →<br />
Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Outbound Delivery Outbound delivery number from the previous exercise.<br />
Select<br />
The system returns a message indicating change to the delivery note.<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 26 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 17: Check Stock Status<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →<br />
Environment → Stock → Stock Overview<br />
Database selections<br />
Material: CHLOK1O1_ _ _<br />
Plant: MI00<br />
Display version: 1<br />
(Execute)<br />
Select the plant line in the display.<br />
Select<br />
This will open a pop-up window showing the details of the inventory by stock type at the level you<br />
selected.<br />
Check the unrestricted use quantity (Unrestricted use) stock type<br />
Check the sales orders quantity (Sales orders) stock type<br />
Check the delivery quantity (Scheduled for delivery) stock type<br />
Record the storage location and quantity of inventory for each Stock type:<br />
Plant<br />
Storage Location<br />
Stock Type Quantity<br />
Unrestricted Use<br />
Sales Orders<br />
Scheduled for Delivery<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 27 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 18: Bill Customer<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VF01<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing Document → Create<br />
The system will default the last delivery document created.<br />
(Execute)<br />
The system displays the customer and the materials on the delivery with total values to be billed.<br />
Record the total amount billed to the customer: $____________________ (net value)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the billing document number that is displayed at the bottom of the screen ________________<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 28 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 19: Post Receipt of Customer Payment<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code F-28<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable →<br />
Document Entry → Incoming Payments<br />
Document Date: Today’s date<br />
Company Code: US00<br />
Currency/Rate: USD<br />
Bank data:<br />
Account: 100000<br />
Amount: Enter the amount of the payment (from sales order)<br />
Open item selection<br />
Account: Enter Your customer # (Created in Exercise 4)<br />
Select<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 29 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Review the balance.<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the document number ______________________<br />
(Exit)<br />
<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 30 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 20: Document Flow<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VA03<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Display<br />
Enter your order number.<br />
Select the following from the System Menu: Environment → Display document flow<br />
The system displays a list of documents associated with the order.<br />
Click on the line of the GD goods issue: delvy 49000….###<br />
Select<br />
Select to view the account postings for this goods movement.<br />
(Back) twice to get to the overview screen<br />
It can be seen that the:<br />
1. The entire document flow is shown.<br />
2. There are no open documents.<br />
3. The business cycle is complete.<br />
Note: You can view the document flow from the Sales Order, Delivery or Billing screens.<br />
Click on the line of the Standard Order<br />
Select the<br />
The document flow can be seen in greater detail.<br />
Click on the line of the Outbound Delivery<br />
Select the<br />
(Continue)<br />
(Exit) Twice To return to SAP Easy Access Menu<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 31 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Unit 3:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 3 is to establish the Organizational Structure for Financial Accounting (FI). Once<br />
the various organizational elements are defined they will need to be assigned. This unit will establish<br />
the core structure necessary to conduct financial transactions within the system.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 32 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 21: Create Company Code<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to define a company code. A company code represents a legal<br />
organizational entity and a separate accounting unit in Financial Accounting (FI). This organizational<br />
element is often referred to as a balanced set of books. The company code is the level at which all<br />
accounting transactions are captured.<br />
** Instructors note: If table is locked by one user, use T-code V/LE Then execute<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Financial Accounting →<br />
Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Double click on Edit Company Code Data<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Company Code = C_ _ _ (where _ _ _ is your student number)<br />
Company Name = (Your Name) Global Bikes Inc. (e.g., John Global Bikes Inc.)<br />
Additional data<br />
City = Vermillion<br />
Country = US<br />
Currency = USD<br />
Language = EN<br />
Select (Address)<br />
Name<br />
Name = (Your Name) Global Bikes Inc. (e.g., John Global Bikes Inc. )<br />
Search Term<br />
Search term = _ _ _ (Your student number)<br />
Address<br />
Street = 123 Forest Avenue<br />
Postal code = 57069<br />
City = Vermillion<br />
Country key = US<br />
Region = SD<br />
(Copy)<br />
(Save)<br />
(Copy)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
(Cancel)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 33 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 22: Create Chart of Accounts<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to copy an existing Chart of Accounts into your own Chart of Accounts.<br />
This is necessary due to the complicated process of establishing the linkages necessary to create your<br />
own retained earnings account. A Chart of Accounts (CBIKE) was established as the basis for your<br />
Chart of Accounts – CBIKE contains only a retained earnings account with all the linkages already<br />
established.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Financial Accounting → General Ledger Accounting → G/L Accounts →<br />
Master Data → Preparations → Edit Chart of Accounts List<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Chart of Accts: C_ _ _<br />
Description: Chart of Accounts – Global Bikes Inc. _ _ _<br />
General specifications<br />
Maint. Language: English<br />
Length of G/L Account Number: 6<br />
<strong>Integration</strong><br />
Controlling integration Manual creation of cost elements<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 34 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 23: Assign Company Code to Chart of Accounts<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to assign your company code to your chart of accounts. A company<br />
code can have only one chart of accounts. A chart of accounts can have more that one company code.<br />
If you have several legal entities within your enterprise, it would make sense to have all of the entities<br />
use the same chart of accounts. This would facilitate the creation of consolidated financial statements.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Financial Accounting → General Ledger Accounting → G/L Accounts →<br />
Master Data → Preparations → Assign Company Code to Chart of Accounts<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Select your company code C_ _ _<br />
Chrt/Accts C_ _ _<br />
(Save)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 35 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 24: Assign Company Code to Fiscal Year Variant<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to assign your company code to a fiscal year variant. A fiscal year variant is used<br />
to define the following:<br />
• how many posting periods a fiscal year has<br />
• how many special periods you need<br />
• how the system is to determine the posting periods when posting<br />
When defining your fiscal year, you have the several options:<br />
• Your fiscal year is the calendar year<br />
• Your fiscal year is not the same as the calendar year and is not year-dependent<br />
• Your fiscal year is not the same as the calendar year and is year-dependent<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings → Fiscal Year →<br />
Assign Company Code to a Fiscal Year Variant<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Select your Company code C_ _ _<br />
Fiscal Year Variant K1 (Cal. Year, 1 Special Period)<br />
(Save)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Please notify your instructor if you encounter problems in saving your entry due to the table<br />
locking mechanism.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 36 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 25: Create Credit Control Area<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create an organizational structure that is used to specify and control<br />
the credit limits for customers.<br />
A credit control area can include one or more company codes. Including more than one company code<br />
in an enterprise allows for the control of a customer’s credit across all company codes assigned to that<br />
credit control area. It is not possible to assign a company code to more than one credit control area.<br />
The credit limits must be specified in the same currency for all company codes in a credit control area.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Financial Accounting →<br />
Define Credit Control Area<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Cred. contr. area C_ _ _<br />
Currency USD<br />
(Back)<br />
Description Global Bikes Inc. Credit Control Dept._ _ _<br />
(Save)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 37 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 26: Assign Company Code to Credit Control Area<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise has you assign your company code to the credit control area you created to manage your<br />
customers credit limits.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Financial Accounting →<br />
Assign company code to credit control area<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Select your Company code C_ _ _<br />
CCAr field C_ _ _<br />
(Save)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 38 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 27: Assign Permitted Credit Control Areas to Company Code<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
In this activity you can enter additional credit control areas which are allowed for each company code,<br />
in addition to this default credit control area.<br />
The control area assigned to the company code only acts as a default value and is used, for example,<br />
for crediting commitments in the case of non-assignable incoming payments from customers.<br />
Otherwise, with every payment, the credit amount is deducted in the control area in which it was also<br />
added (as previously).<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Financial Accounting → Account Receivable and Accounts Payable →<br />
Credit Management → Credit Control Account →<br />
Assign Permitted Credit Control Areas to Company Code<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Credit contr. area C_ _ _<br />
(Save)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 39 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Unit 4:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 4 is to establish the Organizational Structure for Material Management (MM).<br />
Once the various organizational elements are defined they will need to be assigned. This unit will<br />
establish the core structure necessary to conduct material management transactions within the system.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 40 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 28: Verify Valuation Area<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to verify that the valuation area is set to plant level.<br />
Having the valuation set at the plant level facilitates plant level materials requirements planning.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path:<br />
Trans Code: SPRO<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Logistics – General →<br />
Define valuation level<br />
The defined valuation level is preset at the plant level. You can skip this exercise.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 41 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 29: Define Plant<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will allow you to create a plant. A plant is an organizational structure within our company.<br />
As an organizational structure, the plant is assigned to a company code. However a company code<br />
can have several plants.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Logistics – General →<br />
Define, copy, delete, check plant<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Double click on Define Plant<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Plant P_ _ _ (_ _ _ = your student number)<br />
Detailed Information<br />
Factory calendar US<br />
Select (Address)<br />
Name<br />
Name Global Bikes Inc. Warehouse_ _ _<br />
Name 2 Plant _ _ _<br />
Search Term<br />
Search term _ _ _<br />
Street Address<br />
Street 123 Glen Avenue<br />
Postal code 57069<br />
City Vermillion<br />
Country key US<br />
Region SD<br />
(Copy)<br />
(Save)<br />
(Copy)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
(Cancel)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 42 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 30: Define Storage Locations (Inventory and Quality)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you create the locations where our inventory will be physically kept.<br />
A storage location is where the quantity of inventory is managed not the value. The value is managed<br />
at the plant level.<br />
A plant can have more than one storage location.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Materials Management →<br />
Maintain storage location<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Continue)<br />
Click on the button.<br />
SLoc 10<br />
Description Inventory<br />
SLoc 20<br />
Description Quality<br />
(Save)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 43 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 31: Define Purchasing Organization<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create the Purchasing Organization. The purchasing organization<br />
procures materials and services, negotiates conditions of purchase with vendors, and bears<br />
responsibility for such transactions.<br />
The purchasing organization is the organizational unit that subdivides an enterprise according to the<br />
requirements of purchasing.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Materials Management →<br />
Maintain purchasing organization<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Purch Organization: P_ _ _<br />
Purch. Org. Descr.: Purchasing Org. _ _ _<br />
(Save)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 44 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 32: Create Purchasing Group<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise has you create a purchasing group. A purchasing organization (such as created in the<br />
previous exercise) can be subdivided into purchasing groups, which consist of buyers responsible for<br />
certain day-to-day purchasing activities (e.g., precious metals, services, etc.).<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Materials Management → Purchasing → Create Purchasing Groups<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Purchasing Group _ _ _<br />
Desc Pur. Grp. Type in Your Name<br />
Tel. No. Pur. Grp 605 555 1414<br />
(Save)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 45 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 33: Assign Plant to Company Code<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise has you assign your plant to your company code. This will facilitate the recording or<br />
tracking of transactions at the plant level. Each plant must be assigned to a company code. A plant<br />
can only belong to one company code.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Logistics – General →<br />
Assign plant to company code<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
CoCd (Company Code): C_ _ _<br />
Plnt (Plant): P_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 46 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 34: Assign Purchasing Organization to Company Code<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to assign your purchasing organization to your company code. The<br />
assignment can be done differently based on the type of purchasing your organization does. For<br />
example:<br />
• You can assign a purchasing organization to several company codes. This facilitates<br />
corporate-group-wide purchasing.<br />
• You can assign a purchasing organization to one company code. This facilitates companyspecific<br />
purchasing.<br />
• You can assign a purchasing organization to no company code. This purchasing organization<br />
can then procure for all plants assigned to it, without regard to the company code to which it<br />
belongs.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Materials Management →<br />
Assign purchasing organization to company code<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Select your Purchasing Organization<br />
CoCd (Company Code): C_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 47 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 35: Assign Purchasing Organization to Plant<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise allows you to assign your purchasing organization to a plant for plant specific purchasing.<br />
A purchasing organization can be assigned to one or more plants.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Materials Management →<br />
Assign Purchasing Organization to Plant<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
POrg (Purchasing Organization): P_ _ _<br />
Plnt (Plant): P_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 48 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 36: Setup Parameter ID<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of exercise is to establish standard default entries for your user ID.<br />
The parameters established in this exercise provide the default information for your transaction<br />
screens. When establishing defaults for your ID, you would generally not want to create default<br />
parameter values for entries that change frequently.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
System Menu: System → User Profile → Own Data<br />
Select the Parameters tab<br />
Enter the PID and Parameter Value in ALL CAPITALS as the parameter values are case sensitive!<br />
Enter the following Values:<br />
Description (this comes from the<br />
Parameter (PID) Parameter Value Parameter ID and does not need to<br />
be entered by the user)<br />
WRK P_ _ _ Plant<br />
BUK C_ _ _ Company Code<br />
EKG _ _ _ Purchasing Group<br />
EKO P_ _ _ Purchasing Organization<br />
FWS USD Currency Units<br />
GJR 20XX (current<br />
year)<br />
Fiscal Year<br />
KPL C_ _ _ Chart of Accounts<br />
(Enter) to display the short text description<br />
(Save)<br />
Note: This process created a new session – you may close one session if you wish.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
To find the Parameter IDs:<br />
Navigate to the screen that holds the field that requires the parameter and hit F1<br />
Select (Technical information)<br />
Then look for the three digit “Parameter ID” code on the Technical information screen.<br />
Enter this code in the parameter column followed by your most common value for that entry.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 49 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Unit 5:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 5 is to establish some of the Rules (internal controls) for Financial Accounting (FI).<br />
You have established the organizational structure for FI and now you can begin to establish some rules<br />
with regard to the creation and of Master Data and Transactions.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 50 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 37: Create Account Groups<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The account group is a classifying feature within the G/L account master records. The account group<br />
is a required entry.<br />
The account group determines the fields for the entry screens if you create or change a master record<br />
in the company code. In the account group a number range interval is defined to which accounts can<br />
be assigned. Field statuses for each account group control the behavior of the fields when you are<br />
creating a general ledger account such as whether or not the field is required, suppressed, optional, or<br />
display only.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Financial Accounting → General Ledger Accounting → G/L Accounts →<br />
Master Data → Preparations → Define Account Group<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Balance Sheet Accounts<br />
<br />
Chrt/Accts C_ _ _<br />
Acct Group BS<br />
Name Balance Sheet Accounts<br />
From acct 100000<br />
To account 399999<br />
(Enter)<br />
Select C_ _ _, Group BS – Balance Sheet Accounts 100000 – 399999<br />
<br />
Position Cursor on Account Control<br />
(Choose)<br />
Account Control Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry Display<br />
Currency X<br />
Tax category X<br />
Reconciliation account X<br />
Exchange Rate Difference X<br />
Account managed in ext. system X<br />
Only balances in local crcy X<br />
Alternative account number X<br />
Inflation key X<br />
Tolerance group X<br />
(NEXT)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 51 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Account management Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry Display<br />
Line Item Management<br />
Open item management<br />
Sort key<br />
Authorization group<br />
Administrator X<br />
X<br />
(Next)<br />
Document entry Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry Display<br />
Reconcil.acct ready for input X<br />
Field status group X<br />
Post automatically only X<br />
Supplement automatic postings X<br />
(Save)<br />
(Back)<br />
Income Statement Accounts<br />
<br />
Chrt/Accts C_ _ _<br />
Acct Group PL<br />
Name Profit & Loss Accounts<br />
From acct 400000<br />
To account 999999<br />
(Enter)<br />
Select C_ _ _, Group PL – Profit & Loss Accounts 400000 – 999999<br />
<br />
Position Cursor on Account Control<br />
(Choose)<br />
Account Control Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry Display<br />
Currency X<br />
Tax category X<br />
Reconciliation account X<br />
Exchange rate difference X<br />
Account managed in ext. system X<br />
Only balances in local crcy X<br />
Alternative account number X<br />
Inflation key X<br />
Tolerance group X<br />
(Next)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 52 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC<br />
X<br />
X<br />
X
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
<br />
Account management Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry Display<br />
Line Item Management X<br />
Open item management X<br />
Sort key X<br />
Authorization group X<br />
Administrator X<br />
(Next)<br />
Document entry Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry Display<br />
Reconcil.acct ready for input X<br />
Field status group X<br />
Post automatically only X<br />
Supplement automatic postings X<br />
(Save)<br />
(Back)<br />
Reconciliation Accounts<br />
<br />
Chrt/Accts C_ _ _<br />
Acct Group RA<br />
Name Reconciliation Accounts<br />
From acct 110000<br />
To account 310000<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Select C_ _ _, Group RA - Reconciliation Accounts 110000 – 300999<br />
<br />
Position Cursor on Account Control<br />
(Choose)<br />
Account Control Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry Display<br />
Currency X<br />
Tax category X<br />
Reconciliation account X<br />
Exchange rate difference key X<br />
Account managed in ext. system X<br />
Only balances in local crcy X<br />
Alternative account number X<br />
Inflation key X<br />
Tolerance group X<br />
(Next)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 53 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
<br />
Account management Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry Display<br />
Line Item Management<br />
Open item management<br />
Sort key<br />
Authorization group<br />
Administrator (Accounting Clerk) X<br />
X<br />
X<br />
(Next)<br />
Document entry Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry Display<br />
Reconcil.acct ready for input X<br />
Field status group X<br />
Post automatically only X<br />
Supplement automatic postings X<br />
(Save)<br />
(Back)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 54 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC<br />
X<br />
X
Exercise 38: Define Retained Earnings Account<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to designate an account as the retained earnings account in financial<br />
accounting. The retained earnings account is tied to a variety of accounts and is used in closing the<br />
fiscal year. At the end of a fiscal year, the system carries forward the balance of the P&L account to<br />
the retained earnings account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path:<br />
Trans Code: SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Financial Accounting → General Ledger Accounting → G/L Accounts →<br />
Master Data → Preparations → Define Retained Earnings Account<br />
Chart of Accounts C_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
P&L statmt Account<br />
RE 330_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Acknowledge the warning by pressing<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 55 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 39: Review Field Status Variant<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
A field status variant groups together several field status groups. You assign a field status variant to<br />
each company code.<br />
The field status group specifies which fields are ready for input, which fields must be filled or which<br />
fields are suppressed when entering documents. Specifying which fields are required, suppressed,<br />
optional, or display only when using the various general ledger accounts. A field status group is<br />
assigned to a general ledger account when it is created.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings → Document →<br />
Line Item → Controls → Define Field Status Variants<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Select GL00<br />
Double click Field status groups<br />
Select ZALL, All Accounts<br />
<br />
Position Cursor on General Data<br />
(Choose)<br />
General Data Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry<br />
Assignment number X<br />
Text X<br />
Invoice Reference X<br />
Hedging X<br />
Collective Invoice X<br />
Reference specification 1/2 X<br />
Reference specification 3 X<br />
Inflation Index X<br />
View fields statuses (Do not change – only review)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 56 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 40: Assign Company Code to Field Status Variant<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to assign your company code to the field status variant you just created.<br />
By doing this you will allow your company code to use the field status variant and the groups that you<br />
created within the variant.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings → Document →<br />
Line Item → Controls → Assign Company Code to Field Status Variants<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Select your Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Fld stat. var. (Field Status Variant): GL00<br />
(Save)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 57 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Unit 6: Create General Ledger Accounts<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 6 is to create the General Ledger Accounts necessary for the legal reporting<br />
requirements associated with a Balance Sheet and an Income Statement. This includes:<br />
• Balance Sheet accounts for assets, liabilities and retained earnings<br />
• Income Statement for revenues and expenses<br />
The General Ledger Accounts will be created using the Rules you created in Unit 5:<br />
• BS = Balance Sheet Accounts (Assets and Liabilities)<br />
• PL = Profit & Loss Accounts (Revenues and Expenses)<br />
• RA = Reconciliation Accounts (Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 58 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 41: Create Bank Account<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will create a general ledger account for your bank account. This is an asset balance<br />
sheet account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS00<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 100_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Balance Sheet Accounts<br />
Select Radio Button Balance sheet account<br />
Description<br />
Short text: Bank (Checking)<br />
G/L acct long text Bank (Checking Account)<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Currency USD<br />
Select: “Only balances in local currency”<br />
Account Management in Company Code<br />
Select: “Line item display”<br />
Sort key: 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 59 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 42: Create Accounts Receivable Reconciliation Account<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will create the Accounts Receivable Reconciliation account. This account is used to sum<br />
up customer accounts. Multiple reconciliation accounts could be used you wanted to keep track of<br />
different customer accounts. This type of account is normally used wherever there is a high volume of<br />
transactions that can be summarized into a single account for reporting on the Balance Sheet. This is<br />
an asset on the Balance Sheet.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS00<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 110_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Reconciliation Accounts<br />
Select Radio Button Balance sheet account<br />
Description<br />
Short text: AR Recon<br />
G/L acct long text Accounts Receivable Reconciliation<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Currency USD<br />
Recon. acct for acct type: CUSTOMERS<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 60 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 43: Create Trading Goods Inventory Account<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will create a general ledger account for your trading goods inventory account. This is an<br />
asset balance sheet account that records the value of the current inventory.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS00<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 201_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Balance Sheet Accounts<br />
Select Radio Button Balance sheet account<br />
Description<br />
Short text: Inventory - Trading<br />
G/L acct long text Trading Goods Inventory<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Currency USD<br />
Select: “Only balances in local currency”<br />
Account Management in Company Code<br />
Select: “Line item display”<br />
Sort key: 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
Select “Post automatically only”<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 61 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 44: Create Operating Supplies Inventory Account<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will create a general ledger account for your operating supplies inventory account. This<br />
is an asset balance sheet account that records the value of the current inventory.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS00<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 203_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Balance Sheet Accounts<br />
Select Radio Button Balance sheet account<br />
Description<br />
Short text: Operating Supplies<br />
G/L acct long text Operating Supplies Inventory<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Currency USD<br />
Select: “Only balances in local currency”<br />
Account Management in Company Code<br />
Select: “Line item display”<br />
Sort key: 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
Select “Post automatically only”<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 62 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 45: Create Accounts Payable Reconciliation Account<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will create the Accounts Payable Reconciliation account. This account is used to sum up<br />
vendor accounts. Multiple reconciliation accounts could be used you wanted to keep track of different<br />
vendor accounts. This type of account is normally used wherever there is a high volume of<br />
transactions that can be summarized into a single account for reporting on the Balance Sheet. This is<br />
a liability on the Balance Sheet.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS00<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 300_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Reconciliation Accounts<br />
Select Radio Button Balance sheet account<br />
Description<br />
Short text: AP Recon<br />
G/L acct long text Accounts Payable Reconciliation<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Currency USD<br />
Recon. acct for acct type: VENDORS<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 63 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 46: Create Goods Receipt / Invoice Receipt Account<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will create a general ledger account for your Goods Receipt / Invoice Receipt account.<br />
This is an asset balance sheet account that records the value of a goods receipt from a vendor in the<br />
purchasing process prior to matching it up with and invoice from the vendor.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS00<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 310_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Balance Sheet Accounts<br />
Select Radio Button Balance sheet account<br />
Description<br />
Short text: GR/IR Account<br />
G/L acct long text Goods Receipt / Invoice Receipt Account<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Currency USD<br />
Check box Only balances in local currency<br />
Tax category * (All tax types allowed)<br />
Select Posting without tax allowed<br />
Account Management in Company Code<br />
Check Line item display<br />
Sort key: 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
Check “Post automatically only”<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 64 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 47: Create Output Tax Account<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will create a general ledger account for your output tax account. This is an asset balance<br />
sheet account that records the value tax that has been accrued in this account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS00<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 320_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Balance Sheet Accounts<br />
Select Radio Button Balance sheet account<br />
Description<br />
Short text: Accrued Tax - Output<br />
G/L acct long text Accrued Tax - Output<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Currency USD<br />
Select: “Only balances in local currency”<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 65 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 48: Create Input Tax Account<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will create a general ledger account for your input tax account. This is an asset balance<br />
sheet account that records the value tax that has been accrued in this account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS00<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 321_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Balance Sheet Accounts<br />
Select Radio Button Balance sheet account<br />
Description<br />
Short text: Accrued Tax - Input<br />
G/L acct long text Accrued Tax - Input<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Currency USD<br />
Select: “Only balances in local currency”<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 66 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 49: Create Retained Earnings Account<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will extend this account as well as add additional information to the Retained Earnings<br />
account created when you copied the CHLOK1O1 accounts into your C_ _ _ Chart of Accounts.<br />
A Retained Earnings account is a Balance Sheet account that records values to be carried forward<br />
from one period to the next.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS00<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 330_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Balance Sheet Accounts<br />
Select Radio Button Balance sheet account<br />
Description<br />
Short text: Retained Earnings<br />
G/L acct long text Retained Earnings<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Currency USD<br />
Select: “Only balances in local currency”<br />
Account Management in Company Code<br />
Select: “Line item display”<br />
Sort key: 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
Select “Post automatically only”<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 67 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 50: Create Common Stock Account<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will create a general ledger account for your common stock account. This is an asset<br />
balance sheet account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS00<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 350_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Balance Sheet Accounts<br />
Select Radio Button Balance sheet account<br />
Description<br />
Short text: Common Stock<br />
G/L acct long text Common Stock _ _ _<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Currency USD<br />
Select: “Only balances in local currency”<br />
Account Management in Company Code<br />
Select: “Line item display”<br />
Sort key: 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 68 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 51: Create Trading Goods Consumption Expense Account<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create a Trading Goods Consumption Expense account. This<br />
Income Statement account will track the expenses that are posted to this account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS00<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 721_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Profit & Loss Accounts<br />
Select Radio Button P&L statement acct<br />
Description<br />
Short text: Trading Goods Exp.<br />
G/L acct long text Trading Goods Consumption/Expense<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Currency USD<br />
Select Posting without tax allowed<br />
Account Management in Company Code<br />
Select Line item display<br />
Sort Key 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 69 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 52: Create Operating Supplies Expense Account<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create an Operating Supplies Expense account. This Income<br />
Statement account will track the expenses that are posted to this account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS00<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 740_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Profit & Loss Accounts<br />
Select Radio Button P&L statement acct<br />
Description<br />
Short text: Supplies Expense<br />
G/L acct long text Supplies Expense<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Currency USD<br />
Select Posting without tax allowed<br />
Account Management in Company Code<br />
Select Line item display<br />
Sort Key 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 70 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 53: Create Utilities Expense Account<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create a Utilities Expense account. This Income Statement account<br />
will track the expenses that are posted to this account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS00<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 750_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Profit & Loss Accounts<br />
Select Radio Button P&L statement acct<br />
Description<br />
Short text: Utilities Expense<br />
G/L acct long text Utilities Expense Account<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Currency USD<br />
Select Posting without tax allowed<br />
Account Management in Company Code<br />
Select Line item display<br />
Sort Key 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 71 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 54: Create Purchase Price Difference Expense Account<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create a Purchase Price Difference Expense account. This Income<br />
Statement account will track the expenses that are posted to this account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS00<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 760_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Profit & Loss Accounts<br />
Select Radio Button P&L statement acct<br />
Description<br />
Short text: Pur Price Dif Acct<br />
G/L acct long text Purchase Price Difference Account<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Currency USD<br />
Select Posting without tax allowed<br />
Account Management in Company Code<br />
Select Line item display<br />
Sort Key 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 72 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 55: Create Information Technology Expense Account<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create a Information Technology Expense account. This Income<br />
Statement account will track the expenses that are posted to this account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS00<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 770_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Profit & Loss Accounts<br />
Select Radio Button P&L statement acct<br />
Description<br />
Short text: IT Expense<br />
G/L acct long text Information Technology Expense<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Currency USD<br />
Select Posting without tax allowed<br />
Account Management in Company Code<br />
Select Line item display<br />
Sort Key 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 73 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 56: Create Miscellaneous Expense Account<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create a Miscellaneous Expense account. This Income Statement<br />
account will track the expenses that are posted to this account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS00<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 781_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Profit & Loss Accounts<br />
Select Radio Button P&L statement acct<br />
Description<br />
Short text: Misc. Expense<br />
G/L acct long text Miscellaneous Expense<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Currency USD<br />
Select Posting without tax allowed<br />
Account Management in Company Code<br />
Select Line item display<br />
Sort Key 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 74 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 57: Create Cost of Goods Sold Expense Account<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create a Cost of Goods Sold Expense account. This Income<br />
Statement account will track the expenses that are posted to this account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS00<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 790_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Profit & Loss Accounts<br />
Select Radio Button P&L statement acct<br />
Description<br />
Short text: Cost of Goods Sold<br />
G/L acct long text Cost of Goods Sold Expense<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Currency USD<br />
Select Posting without tax allowed<br />
Account Management in Company Code<br />
Select Line item display<br />
Sort Key 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
(Save)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 75 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 58: Run General Ledger List of Accounts Report<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will provide you with a report that summarizes all accounts assigned to your company<br />
code. Use this accounts to verify that you have indeed created all the accounts you needed to create<br />
for your company.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Information System →<br />
General Ledger Reports → Master Data → Chart of Accounts →<br />
SAP Minimal Variant<br />
Chart of Accounts: C_ _ _<br />
(Execute)<br />
Review the list of accounts<br />
Verify details of:<br />
G/L Account Description – Short Text<br />
100_ _ _ Bank (Checking Account)<br />
110_ _ _ Account Receivable Reconciliation<br />
201_ _ _ Trading Goods Inventory<br />
203_ _ _ Operating Supplies Inventory<br />
300_ _ _ Accounts Payable Reconciliation<br />
310_ _ _ Goods Receipt / Invoice Receipt Account<br />
320_ _ _ Accrued Tax – Output<br />
321_ _ _ Accrued Tax – Input<br />
330_ _ _ Retained Earnings<br />
350_ _ _ Common Stock<br />
721_ _ _ Trading Goods Consumption / Expense<br />
740_ _ _ Supplies Expense<br />
750_ _ _ Utilities Expense<br />
760_ _ _ Purchase Price Difference Account<br />
770_ _ _ Information Technology Expense<br />
781_ _ _ Miscellaneous Expense<br />
790_ _ _ Cost of Goods Sold Expense<br />
(Back)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 76 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Unit 7<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 7 is to create the Rules (internal controls) and Master Data necessary for Material<br />
Management. This includes:<br />
• Rules that control how master data is created and how master data responds when used in<br />
transactions.<br />
• Master Data<br />
o Vendor Master Data – who you buy from<br />
o Material Master Data – what you buy<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 77 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 59: Vendor Account Groups<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise is to have you review the different account groups that you will use to create your<br />
vendors. Account groups control the data required to create vendors just as the account groups you<br />
created for general ledger accounts controlled the information required to create general ledger<br />
accounts.<br />
This is a review only exercise (Do not change or save).<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable →<br />
Vendor Accounts → Master Data →<br />
Preparations for Creating Vendor Master Data →<br />
Define Account Groups with Screen Layout (Vendors)<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
System Menu: Table View Change-->Display<br />
Select KRED - Vendor (int.number assgnmnt)<br />
(Details)<br />
Select General Data<br />
Select<br />
Review the required fields by double clicking on the various groups<br />
DO NOT CHANGE ANY FIELDS<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 78 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 60: Create Vendor Master Accounting Record<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise has you create the general and financial views of a vendor master record. <strong>Business</strong><br />
transactions are posted to accounts and managed using those accounts. A master record must be<br />
created for each account that you require. Vendor master records have three primary views:<br />
• General Data<br />
• Financial Accounting Data – often referred to as company code data and<br />
• Purchasing Data<br />
The master record can be created by financial accounting or purchasing. The record can be created<br />
with only that department’s view along with the general view or it can be created centrally if all the<br />
information is known.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FK01<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Master Records →<br />
Create<br />
Vendor: Leave blank<br />
Company code C_ _ _<br />
Account group KRED<br />
(Enter)<br />
Create Vendor: Address<br />
Name<br />
Name: Advanced Cycling Ltd. _ _ _<br />
Search Term<br />
Search term _ _ _(Your Student Number)<br />
Address<br />
Postal code 95929<br />
City Chico<br />
Country US<br />
Region CA<br />
Communication<br />
Language English<br />
(Enter) Note: Page forward past views that do not contain relevant information…<br />
Create Vendor: Control N/A<br />
(Enter)<br />
Create Vendor: Payment transaction N/A<br />
(Enter)<br />
Create Vendor: Accounting Information<br />
Recon. Account: 300_ _ _<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 79 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
(Enter)<br />
Create Vendor: Payment transaction Accounting<br />
Payt term (Payment Terms): 0001<br />
Select Check double inv.<br />
(Enter)<br />
Create Vendor: Correspondence Accounting N/A<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the vendor number _________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 80 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 61: Create Vendor Master Purchasing Record<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise has you create the purchasing view for the vendor master you created in the previous<br />
exercise. Since you have a vendor number, this will be needed to complete the creation of the<br />
purchasing view.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MK01<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Master Data → Vendor →<br />
Purchasing → Create<br />
Create a purchasing view for your Advanced Cycling Ltd. _ _ _ vendor.<br />
Vendor Internal # from previous exercise<br />
Purchasing Organization P_ _ _<br />
Account group KRED.<br />
(Enter)<br />
Create Vendor: Purchasing Data<br />
Conditions<br />
Order Currency USD<br />
Terms of payment 0001<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 81 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 62: Create Vendor Master Record Centrally<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise has you create all three views of the vendor master (general, financial, and purchasing).<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code XK01<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Master Data → Vendor →<br />
Central → Create<br />
Create all views for a new vendor called SLICK BIKES _ _ _.<br />
Vendor Leave Blank (system will generate the number)<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Purchasing Organization P_ _ _<br />
Account group KRED.<br />
(Enter)<br />
Create Vendor: Address<br />
Name<br />
Name SLICK BIKES _ _ _<br />
Search Term<br />
Search term _ _ _(Your Student Number)<br />
Address<br />
Postal code 53201<br />
City Milwaukee<br />
Country US<br />
Region WI<br />
Communication<br />
Language English<br />
(Enter) Note: Page forward past views that do not contain relevant information…<br />
Create Vendor: Control N/A<br />
Create Vendor: Payment transactions N/A<br />
Create Vendor: Accounting Information<br />
Recon. Account = 300_ _ _<br />
Create Vendor: Payment<br />
Payment term = 0001<br />
Select Check double inv.<br />
Create Vendor: Correspondence Accounting N/A<br />
Create Vendor: Purchasing Data<br />
Order Currency = USD<br />
Terms of payment = 0001<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the vendor number _________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 82 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 63: Create Vendor Master Record Centrally<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise has you create all three views of the vendor master (general, financial, and purchasing).<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code XK01<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Master Data → Vendor →<br />
Central → Create<br />
Create all views for a new vendor called PREMIER BIKES _ _ _.<br />
Vendor Leave Blank (system will generate the number)<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Purchasing Organization P_ _ _<br />
Account group KRED.<br />
(Enter)<br />
Create Vendor: Address<br />
Name<br />
Name Premier Bikes _ _ _<br />
Search Term<br />
Search term _ _ _ (Your Student Number)<br />
Address<br />
Postal code 70803<br />
City Baton Rouge<br />
Country US<br />
Region LA<br />
Communication<br />
Language English<br />
(Enter) Note: Page forward past views that do not contain relevant information…<br />
Create Vendor: Control N/A<br />
Create Vendor: Payment transactions N/A<br />
Create Vendor: Accounting Information<br />
Recon. Account = 300_ _ _<br />
Create Vendor: Payment<br />
Payment term = 0001<br />
Select Check double inv.<br />
Create Vendor: Correspondence Accounting N/A<br />
Create Vendor: Purchasing Data<br />
Order Currency = USD<br />
Terms of payment = 0001<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the vendor number _________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 83 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 64: Create Vendor Master Record Centrally<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise has you create all three views of the vendor master (general, financial, and purchasing).<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code XK01<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Master Data → Vendor →<br />
Central → Create<br />
Create all views for a new vendor called International Bicycle Supply AG _ _ _.<br />
Vendor Leave Blank (system will generate the number)<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Purchasing Organization P_ _ _<br />
Account group KRED.<br />
(Enter)<br />
Create Vendor: Address<br />
Name<br />
Name International Bicycle Supply AG _ _ _<br />
Search Term<br />
Search term _ _ _ (Your Student Number)<br />
Address<br />
Postal code 57101<br />
City Sioux Falls<br />
Country US<br />
Region SD<br />
Communication<br />
Language English<br />
(Enter) Note: Page forward past views that do not contain relevant information…<br />
Create Vendor: Control N/A<br />
Create Vendor: Payment transactions N/A<br />
Create Vendor: Accounting Information<br />
Recon. Account = 300_ _ _<br />
Create Vendor: Payment<br />
Payment term = 0001<br />
Select Check double inv.<br />
Create Vendor: Correspondence Accounting N/A<br />
Create Vendor: Purchasing Data<br />
Order Currency = USD<br />
Terms of payment = 0001<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the vendor number _________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 84 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 65: Initialize the Fiscal Period for Company Code<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to initialize the fiscal period for your company code. This allows for the<br />
movement of materials and will facilitate your ability to conduct transactions. Great care needs to be<br />
utilized when carrying out this exercise.<br />
Note: If you create an initial posting period in the future, no transactions will be possible until that<br />
period. You will then need to start over at the beginning of the exercises.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Logistics – General → Material Master → Basic Settings →<br />
Maintain Company Codes for Materials Management<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information for your Company Code:<br />
Year 20XX (current year)<br />
Pe (Period) Enter the current period (1=January; 2=February, etc.)<br />
Select ABp (allow posting to previous period)<br />
(Save)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 85 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 66: Maintain Plant Parameters for Materials Management<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
In this exercise you will specify the plant parameters you will need for material requirements planning.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Materials Management → Consumption-Based Planning → Plant Parameters →<br />
Carry Out Overall Maintenance of Plant Parameters<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information<br />
Select<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Select<br />
Select<br />
Select<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Select<br />
Environment<br />
Select<br />
Number Ranges<br />
Select<br />
Assign no. range 01 to your plant (Save) (Back)<br />
Select<br />
Assign no. range 01 to your plant (Save) (Back)<br />
Select<br />
Assign no. range 01 to your plant (Save) (Back)<br />
Select<br />
Assign no. range 01 to your plant (Save) (Back)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 86 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Select<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Assign no. range 01 to your plant (Save) (Back twice)<br />
Master data<br />
Select<br />
Select<br />
Plant: P_ _ _<br />
MRP controller _ _ _ and description (Your name)<br />
(Save) (Back three times)<br />
Select<br />
Select<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Marg. _ _ _ ( Your Student Number)<br />
Op.Per. 1 (Workdays prior to order start)<br />
Fl Bef 1 (Workdays between order start and scheduled start)<br />
Fl After 1 (Workdays between order due date and scheduled<br />
finish date)<br />
Rel. Per: 1 (Workdays in release period)<br />
(Save) (Back twice)<br />
Planned Orders<br />
Select<br />
Number of planned orders 1<br />
(Save) (Back)<br />
Select<br />
Select your plant<br />
Avail. Check Rule PP<br />
(Save) (Back)<br />
Reporting<br />
Select<br />
Select Display list<br />
Frequency 1<br />
(Save) (Back)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 87 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Planning Run<br />
Select<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Plant parameters<br />
Select Scheduling: Info Rec/Agreemt<br />
Schedule lines . 3 (Schedule Lines)<br />
Unknown Acct Assignment U (Unknown)<br />
(Save) (Back two times)<br />
Select<br />
Planning horizon 15<br />
(Save) (Back three times)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 88 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 67: Activate Material Requirements Planning<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise activates Material Requirements Planning for your plant.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Materials Management → Consumption-Based Planning → Planning →<br />
Activate Material Requirements Planning<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Select<br />
Select Activate requirements planning for your plant<br />
(Save) (Back twice)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 89 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 68: Define Attributes for Material Types<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to define the attributes for the material types. The attributes for a<br />
material type determine the functions allowed for materials of that category (HAWA, HIBE, etc.). Each<br />
material type has specific functions and views required to maintain the data.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Logistics – General → Material Master → Basic Settings → Material Types →<br />
Define Attributes of Material Types<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Select HAWA (Training Goods)<br />
Double Click Quantity/value updating<br />
Qty updating Select<br />
Value update Select<br />
(Save)<br />
(Back<br />
Complete the same set of operations for HIBE (Operating Supplies), FERT (Finished Goods) and<br />
ROH (Raw Materials) after you are done with HAWA.<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 90 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 69: Create Material Master for Trading Goods<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you create the trading good materials that will be necessary for your company.<br />
The Material Master has several views as you saw in the previous exercise when looking at the<br />
material type attributes. The views required are dependent on the type of material and the functionality<br />
required by the company.<br />
This exercise will also introduce you to the use of defaults in the creation of material master data.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MMH1<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material →<br />
Create (Special) → Trading Goods<br />
First set the defaults (you may need to select the industry sector prior to setting the defaults)<br />
Select industry sector Retail<br />
**Important! The following steps are done through the system menu, the menu across the top of the<br />
screen. Do not click on the buttons, as they will not give complete information.<br />
System Menu: Defaults→ Industry Sector Retail<br />
(Enter)<br />
System Menu: Defaults→ Views<br />
Select the following views: Basic data 1<br />
Purchasing<br />
MRP 1<br />
MRP 2<br />
MRP 3<br />
General Plant Data/Storage 1<br />
Accounting 1<br />
(Deselect the Sales Views if selected)<br />
Select Create views selected<br />
(Enter)<br />
System Menu: Default→ Organization levels… Copy from…<br />
Plant: P_ _ _ P_ _ _<br />
All other fields should be blank. Remove all references to US00. If there is a field for Company<br />
Code, enter C_ _ _ and C_ _ _ in copy from field.<br />
Leave storage location blank (storage locations will be created automatically)<br />
(Enter)<br />
Enter the following information to create the materials:<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 91 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Material HELM_ _ _<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
(You may need to press enter once or twice to pass the views and organization level selections<br />
if you did not indicate that you only wanted to view these on request)<br />
Use the information following table for the inputs into the material master. Repeat the process for each<br />
of the materials.<br />
Use your student number for all entries where _ _ _ is indicated.<br />
Use the following information to create the materials<br />
Material Name HELM_ _ _ ULOK_ _ _ SADL_ _ _ PUMP_ _ _<br />
Basic data 1 View<br />
Description Helmet U Lock Saddle Pump<br />
Base Unit of Measure Each (EA) Each (EA) Each (EA) Each (EA)<br />
Material Group SFTY ACCES ACCES ACCES<br />
Gross Weight / Unit 15 Oz 1 lb 1.2 lb 1 lb<br />
Net Weight / Unit 15 Oz 1 lb 1.2 lb 1 lb<br />
Purchasing View<br />
Purchasing Group _ _ _ _ _ _<br />
MRP 1 View<br />
_ _ _ _ _ _<br />
MRP Type PD PD PD PD<br />
MRP Controller _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _<br />
Lot size EX EX EX EX<br />
Minimum Lot Size 12 12<br />
MRP 2 View<br />
10 40<br />
Planned Deliv. Time 3 3 6 3<br />
SchedMargin key _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _<br />
Safety Stock 50 25<br />
MRP 3 View<br />
25 50<br />
Availability check 02 02 02 02<br />
Accounting 1 View<br />
Valuation Class 3100 3100 3100 3100<br />
Moving price $ 6.50 $ 12.50 $ 23.00 $ 4.25<br />
Price Unit 1 1 1 1<br />
(Save after each material)<br />
Record the system messages:<br />
Message<br />
Instructors Note: If Material Group ACCES does not exist, use t-code WG21 to create. See note in the<br />
front of the instructors manual.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 92 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 70: (Optional) Create Material Master for Operating Supplies<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you create the operating supplies that will be necessary for your company. The<br />
Material Master has several views as you saw in the previous exercise when looking at the material<br />
type attributes. The views required are dependent on the type of material and the functionality required<br />
by the company.<br />
Use the same default information for this exercise that you used when creating the trading good<br />
material master data.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MMI1<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material →<br />
Create (Special) → Operating Supplies<br />
Enter material: TAPE_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Use the following information to create the materials<br />
Material Tape_ _ _ Tissue _ _ _ Paper_ _ _ Forms_ _ _<br />
Basic data 1 View<br />
Description Tape Tissue Paper Forms<br />
Base Unit of Measure Each (EA) Carton (CAR) Each (EA) Carton (CAR)<br />
Material Group 01 01 01 01<br />
Gross Weight / Unit 8 Oz 1 lb 1 lb 30 lb<br />
Net Weight / Unit 8 Oz 1 lb 1 lb 30 lb<br />
Purchasing<br />
Order Unit DZ CV<br />
Conversion factor for U of M 1 = 12 1 = 10<br />
Purchasing Group _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _<br />
MRP 1 View<br />
MRP Type PD PD PD VB<br />
Reorder Point 1<br />
MRP Controller _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _<br />
Lot size FX EX FX EX<br />
Minimum Lot Size 1 1<br />
Fixed lot size 12 10<br />
Continue on next page…<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 93 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
MRP 2 View<br />
Planned Deliv. Time 1 1 2 5<br />
SchedMargin key _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _<br />
Safety Stock 10 10 2 1<br />
MRP 3 View<br />
Availability check 02 02 02 02<br />
Accounting 1 View<br />
Valuation Class 3030 3030 3030 3030<br />
Moving price $ 9.60 $ 2.50 $ 35.50 $ 52.50<br />
Price Unit 12 1 10 1<br />
(Save after each material)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 94 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Unit 8:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 8 is to establish some of the rules that will control the financial accounting (FI)<br />
transactions. In addition to the rules document number ranges will be established and a payment<br />
program will be established.<br />
Once these rules and other parameters are established you will test your system in the next unit.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 95 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 71: Define Posting Periods Variant<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will define the variant to which the posting period will be assigned. Financial accounting<br />
(FI) posting periods will be opened to allow transactions to be tracked by period. This variant will then<br />
be assigned to your company code.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings → Document →<br />
Posting Periods → Define Variants for Open Posting Periods<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on<br />
Variant V_ _ _<br />
Name Posting Period Variant _ _ _<br />
(Save)<br />
(Back twice)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 96 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 72: Open and Close Posting Periods<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to establish when the posting periods will be effective. In addition to<br />
establishing the open posting periods for financial accounting, you will also define the additional special<br />
closing periods. This will be in accord with the fiscal year variant (K1 – calendar year with 1 special<br />
closing period) you set up earlier.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings → Document →<br />
Posting Periods → Open and Close Posting Periods<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on<br />
Var. V_ _ _<br />
A + (Valid for all accounts)<br />
Leave account columns blank<br />
Open periods 1 to 12 plus one extra period for current fiscal year by typing the following:<br />
From per 1 1<br />
Year 20XX (current year)<br />
To period 12<br />
Year Current year + 3 years<br />
From per 2 13<br />
Year 20XX (current year)<br />
To period 13<br />
Year Current year + 3 years<br />
(Save)<br />
(Back twice)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 97 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 73: Assign Posting Period Variant to Company Code<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you assign the posting period variant to your company code.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings → Document →<br />
Posting Periods → Assign Variants to Company Code<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Find your Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Variant V_ _ _<br />
(Save)<br />
(Back)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 98 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 74: Create Tolerance Groups for Account Postings<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to set up the tolerances you will use for the entry of financial accounting<br />
(FI) documents. A blank group is a valid tolerance group. By creating a blank group code the system<br />
will apply these rules as defaults unless a specific group is entered resulting in any person not<br />
assigned to another group by default will be assigned to this group<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings → Document →<br />
Line Item → Define Tolerance Groups for Employees<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Group Leave blank<br />
Company code C_ _ _<br />
Upper limits for posting procedures<br />
Amount per document 1,000,000<br />
Amount per open item account item 100,000<br />
Cash discount per line item 5%<br />
Permitted payment differences<br />
Revenue 100 10% 10<br />
Expense 100 10% 10<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
(Back twice)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 99 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 75: Setup Payment Program<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
The payment program allows the company to have flexibility in paying bills.<br />
Example 1<br />
Company code 0001 pays its own items and the items of company codes 0002 and 0003. All items are<br />
grouped into one payment.<br />
Company code Paying company code Sending company code<br />
0001 0001 0001<br />
0002 0001 0001<br />
0003 0001 0001<br />
Example 2<br />
Company code 0001 pays its own items and the items of company codes 0002 and 0003. However, a<br />
separate payment is created for each company code.<br />
Company code Paying company code Sending company code<br />
0001 0001 0001<br />
0002 0001 0002<br />
0003 0001 0003<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable →<br />
<strong>Business</strong> Transactions → Outgoing Payments →<br />
Automatic Outgoing Payments →<br />
Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program →<br />
Setup All Company Codes for Payment Transactions<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Sending company code C_ _ _ (your company code)<br />
Paying company code C_ _ _ (your company code)<br />
(Save)<br />
(Back twice)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 100 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 76: Create Tolerance Groups for Accounts Receivable and<br />
Accounts Payable<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will create tolerance groups that contain rules that affect cash discount and payment<br />
difference processing. These rules become effective during payment entry.<br />
As with earlier tolerances, a blank group field means that these rules will apply to all persons not<br />
assigned to a specific group.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable →<br />
<strong>Business</strong> Transactions → Outgoing Payments → Manual Outgoing Payments →<br />
Define Tolerances (Vendors)<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Tolerance group Leave blank<br />
Tolerance group description DEFAULT _ _ _<br />
Permitted Payment Differences<br />
Gain<br />
o Amount 10<br />
o Percent 1<br />
Loss<br />
o Amount 1<br />
o Percent 1<br />
Specifications for Posting Residual Items from Payment Differences<br />
Select Payment Term from Invoice<br />
Select Only grant partial cash disc<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
(Back twice)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 101 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 77: Create Financial Accounting (FI) Document Numbers<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to have you establish which number ranges are assigned to the<br />
company code. Each document in the system is unique based on the following:<br />
• Company Code<br />
• Fiscal Year<br />
• Document Number<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings → Document →<br />
Document Number Ranges → Copy to Company Code<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Source Company Code Details<br />
Company code US00<br />
Target Company Code Details<br />
Company code C_ _ _<br />
(Execute)<br />
to accept the message.<br />
Review the information<br />
(Back twice)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 102 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Unit 9:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 9 is to post your initial cash investment and conduct and initial test on the system<br />
by posting the purchase of some supplies.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 103 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 78: Review Document Types<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to review the different type of documents you will be using. A document<br />
type is used to; distinguish between different types of business transactions, the document type<br />
controls which account type that you are allowed to post (G/L account, customer, vendor, fixed<br />
assets….), and a document type is assigned to a specific document number range. Below are listed a<br />
few of the document types that we will be using throughout this course.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings → Document →<br />
Document Header → Define Document Types<br />
Trans Code SPRO<br />
(Change -> Display)<br />
Make sure the title of the screen is: Display View “Document Types”; Overview<br />
Select the following document types and record the Document Number Ranges<br />
Review the details of:<br />
Document type Document Document Number Range<br />
DR Customer invoice<br />
DZ Customer payment<br />
KR Vendor invoice<br />
KZ Vendor payment<br />
RE Invoice – Gross<br />
SA G/L account document<br />
WA Goods issue<br />
WE Goods receipt<br />
(Details) list the Documents Number Range in the table above.<br />
(Back twice)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 104 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 79: Post Initial Cash Investment by Owners<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to test your initial FI setup. The business scenario is that you ingest<br />
$750,000 to start up your business. You need to account for this transaction in your Financial<br />
Accounting System.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FB50<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Posting→<br />
Enter G/L Account Document<br />
Basic data Tab<br />
Document Date Today’s date<br />
Currency USD<br />
Company Code (Your code should default)<br />
On the first line Enter:<br />
G/L acct 100_ _ _ (Bank - Checking)<br />
D/C Debit<br />
Amount in doc.curr. $ 750,000<br />
On the second line Enter:<br />
G/L acct 350_ _ _ (Common Stock)<br />
D/C Credit<br />
Amount in doc.curr. $ 750,000<br />
(Enter)<br />
Use the button to see if the postings are correct.<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 105 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 80: Post Purchase of Operating Supplies<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to test your initial FI setup. The business scenario is that you need<br />
some office supplies immediately. You drive down to Office Supply Depot and buy $75 of supplies<br />
(paper, folders, etc) and pay for the purchase with a company check.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Posting→<br />
Enter G/L Account Document<br />
Basic data Tab<br />
Document Date Today’s date<br />
Currency USD<br />
Company Code (Your code should default)<br />
On the first line Enter:<br />
G/L acct 740_ _ _ (Supplies Expense Account)<br />
D/C Debit<br />
Amount in doc.curr. $ 75<br />
On the second line Enter:<br />
G/L acct 100_ _ _ (Bank - Checking)<br />
D/C Credit<br />
Amount in doc.curr. $ 75<br />
(Enter)<br />
Use the button to see if the postings are correct.<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
(To return to the Easy Access Menu)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 106 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 81: Display and Review General Ledger Account Balances<br />
and Individual Line Items<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to Display the General Ledger Account balance and line item.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Account →<br />
Display Balances<br />
Trans Code FS10N or FAGLB03<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
G/L Account 100_ _ _<br />
Company code C_ _ _<br />
Fiscal year 20XX (current year)<br />
(Execute)<br />
Record the entry below<br />
(Back)<br />
G/L Account 350_ _ _<br />
(Execute)<br />
Record the entry below<br />
(Back)<br />
G/L Account 740_ _ _<br />
(Execute)<br />
Record the entry below<br />
Record the balances for the current period<br />
Account Period Debit Credit Balance Cumulative<br />
Balance<br />
100_ _ _<br />
350_ _ _<br />
740_ _ _<br />
(Back)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 107 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
<strong>Business</strong> Case Scenario<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
Global Bikes Inc. has rented more warehouse space and is about to receive the invoice for the first<br />
month’s lease. In order to do this, you must create a new vendor and add an expense account for rent.<br />
Unit 10:<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 10 is to test your systems ability to receive invoices from vendors and post<br />
payment to the vendors account.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 108 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 82: Create Vendor Master Record for Landlord<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create a new vendor. The Chief Financial Officer has requested you<br />
create a new vendor account for Brewers Bikes leasing – the firm from which you are renting your new<br />
office and warehouse space.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FK01<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Master Records →<br />
Create<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Vendor Leave blank<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Account group KRED<br />
Reference<br />
Reference (one of your other vendors)<br />
Company code C_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Create Vendor: Address<br />
Name<br />
Name Brewers Bikes leasing _ _ _<br />
Search Term<br />
Search term _ _ _<br />
Street Address<br />
Postal code 57069<br />
City Vermillion<br />
Country US<br />
Region SD<br />
Language EN<br />
(Enter three times)<br />
Create Vendor: Accounting information Accounting<br />
Accounting Information<br />
Recon. account 300_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Create Vendor: Payment transactions Accounting<br />
Payment data<br />
Payt Terms 0001<br />
Select Chk double inv.<br />
(Save)<br />
(Back)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 109 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 83: Create Rent Expense Account<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise has you create and new expense account for rent in your chart of accounts using a<br />
previous account as a template for the new account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS00<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account 780_ _ _<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Click on<br />
G/L Account 781_ _ _<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
(Continue)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Description<br />
Short Text Rent Expense<br />
G/L Acct Long Text Rent Expense<br />
All other settings remain unchanged.<br />
(Save)<br />
(Back)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 110 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 84: Create Invoice Receipt for Rent Expense<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to log the invoice that Brewers Bikes leasing, Inc. has sent for the first<br />
month’s rent of $1,500.00 total. Please post the invoice using the accounts you have created in your<br />
Company code.<br />
INVOICE # 123 Brewers Bikes Leasing,<br />
Inc.<br />
CURRENT Month Rent<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FB60<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Document Entry →<br />
Invoice<br />
If your Company Code did not default in:<br />
System Menu: Edit → Change Company Code and enter yours.<br />
Basic data Tab<br />
Vendor (# for Brewers Bikes leasing _ _ _)<br />
Invoice date Today<br />
Amount $ 1,500<br />
G/L acct 780_ _ _ (Rent Expense)<br />
D/C Debit<br />
Amount in doc.curr. $ 1,500<br />
(Enter)<br />
Use the button to see if the postings are correct.<br />
Verify details of:<br />
Account Description Amount Comments<br />
100_ _ _ Brewers Bikes leasing 1500-<br />
780_ _ _ Rent Expense 1500<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
(To return to the Easy Access Menu)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 111 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 85: Display and Review General Ledger Account Balances<br />
and Individual Line Items<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to display the Rent Expense account balance and line item.<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS10N<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Account →<br />
Display Balances<br />
G/L account 780_ _ _<br />
Company code C_ _ _<br />
Fiscal year 20XX (current year)<br />
(Execute)<br />
Record the information in the ledger below.<br />
Double click on period balance to see individual line items.<br />
Record the balance of the Rent Expense Account for the current and previous period<br />
Period Debit Credit Balance Cumulative<br />
Balance<br />
(Exit Twice)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 112 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 86: Display and Review Vendor Account Balances and<br />
Individual Line Items<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to display the Vendor account balance and line item.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS10N<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting→ Financial accounting→ Accounts Payable→ Account→<br />
Display Balances<br />
Vendor Vendor # for Brewers Bikes leasing<br />
Company code C_ _ _<br />
Fiscal year 20XX (current year)<br />
(Execute)<br />
Record the information in the ledger below.<br />
Double click on period balance to see individual line items.<br />
Record the balance of the Vendor Account for the current and previous period<br />
Period Debit Credit Balance Cumulative<br />
Balance<br />
(Exit Twice)<br />
Sales/<br />
Purchases<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 113 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 87: Post Payment to Landlord<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you pay the invoice from Brewers Bikes leasing which is due for payment now.<br />
You are requested to clear the invoice amount by posting an outgoing payment using the bank account<br />
of your chart of accounts.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code F-53<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Document Entry →<br />
Outgoing Payment → Post<br />
Document Date Today’s date<br />
Bank data<br />
Account 100_ _ _ (Bank - Checking)<br />
Amount 1500<br />
Text Invoice # 123<br />
Open items selection<br />
Account (Vendor # for Brewers Bikes Leasing _ _ _)<br />
All other settings remain unchanged.<br />
Select<br />
Review the line item information.<br />
Double click on the line item you want to post payment against. When assignment has been made<br />
correctly the ‘Not assigned’ value on the bottom should equal $0.00<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
(To return to the Easy Access Menu)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 114 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 88: Display and Review General Ledger and Vendor Account<br />
Balances and Individual Line Items<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
To Display the Vendor account balance and line item<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS10N<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Account →<br />
Display Balances<br />
G/L account 780_ _ _<br />
Company code C_ _ _<br />
Fiscal year 20XX (current year)<br />
(Execute)<br />
Double click on period balance to see line items.<br />
Record details of payment to landlord:<br />
Type Doc. Date Amount in local cur. Document No<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FBL1N<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Account →<br />
Display/Change Line Items<br />
Vendor selection<br />
Vendor account (Vendor # for Brewers Bikes Leasing _ _ _)<br />
Company code C_ _ _<br />
Line item selection<br />
Select All items<br />
(Execute)<br />
Double click on individual document to see additional information.<br />
Verify details of:<br />
Status Document No Type Amount in doc. curr.<br />
(Exit Twice)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 115 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Unit 11:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 11 is to establish some of the rules that will control the material management (MM)<br />
transactions. Included in these rules is the configuration of automatic account assignment.<br />
Once these rules and other parameters are established you will test your system in the next unit.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 116 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 89: Set Default Values for Inventory Management<br />
Reservations<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will enable the system to automatically create a storage location upon goods receipt.<br />
The movement allowed indicator must be turned on to allow goods movements for reservations. The<br />
Days movement allowed limits the goods movements to a specific number of days prior to the<br />
reservation date. The Retention period is the number of days after the reservation date the system will<br />
hold the reservation before setting the deletion indicator.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Materials Management → Inventory Management and Physical Inventory →<br />
Plant Parameters<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Goods movements<br />
Select Create SLoc.automat.<br />
Select Del. compl. default<br />
Reservations<br />
Select Movement Allowed<br />
Days mvt. allowed 15 days<br />
Retention period 15 days<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 117 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 90: Maintain Purchasing Tolerance Limits<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is for you to decide how much variation from the data in the purchase<br />
order will be allowed.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order →<br />
Set Tolerance Limits for Price Variance<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Tolerance key PE (Price variance: purchasing)<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Select “Do not check” for all limits.<br />
(Next Entry)<br />
Tolerance key SE (Max. cash disc. deduction purchasing)<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Select “Do not check” for all limits.<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 118 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 91: Maintain Goods Receipt Tolerance Limits<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is for you to decide how much variation from the data in the<br />
purchase/production order will be allowed.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Materials Management → Inventory Management and Physical Inventory →<br />
Goods Receipt → Set Tolerance Limits<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Tolerance key B1 (Order price qty variance (GR)/E-MSG)<br />
Enter your company code: C_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Select “Do not check” for all limits.<br />
(Next Entry)<br />
Tolerance key B2 (Order price qty variance (GR)/W-MSG)<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Lower limit<br />
Percentage<br />
Select Check limit<br />
Tolerance limit 10 %<br />
Upper limit<br />
Percentage<br />
Select Check limit<br />
Tolerance limit 0 %<br />
(Next Entry)<br />
Tolerance key VP Moving average price variance<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Select “Do not check” for all limits.<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 119 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 92: Maintain Invoice Receipt Tolerance Limits<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is for you to decide how much variation from the data in the purchase<br />
order will be allowed.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Materials Management → Logistics Invoice Verification → Invoice Block →<br />
Set Tolerance Limits<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Tolerance key Reference table below<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Select “Do not check” for all limits.<br />
(Save)<br />
Use the (Next Entry) button to move to the next blank screen<br />
Repeat for each tolerance keys in the table below:<br />
Description Tolerance Key<br />
Amount for item without order reference AN<br />
Amount for item with order reference AP<br />
Form small differences automatically BD<br />
Percentage OPUn Variance (IR before GR) BR<br />
Percentage OPUn Variance (GR before IR) BW<br />
Exceed amount: quantity variance DQ<br />
Var. from condition value KW<br />
Price variance PP<br />
Price variance: estimated price PS<br />
Date variance (value x days) ST<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 120 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 93: Set (review) Valuation Control<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you activate the valuation grouping code, you can group together valuation<br />
areas allowing multiple plants to share the same rules. This makes the configuration of automatic<br />
postings much easier.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Materials Management → Valuation and Account Assignment →<br />
Account Determination → Account Determination Without Wizard→<br />
Define Valuation Control<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
The valuation grouping code default is set as active<br />
Verify that the valuation grouping code is active.<br />
(Back)<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 121 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 94: Assign Valuation Area Grouping<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise has you group together valuation areas and use the same rules for account<br />
determination. Within the chart of accounts, you assign the valuation grouping code to the valuation<br />
areas you want to assign to the same account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Materials Management → Valuation and Account Assignment →<br />
Account Determination → Account Determination Without Wizard →<br />
Group Together Valuation Areas<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Assign valuation grouping code to your valuation area<br />
Val. Grpg Code G_ _ _<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 122 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 95: Define (review) Valuation Classes<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to review which valuation classes are assigned to each material type<br />
and account category reference.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Materials Management → Valuation and Account Assignment →<br />
Account Determination → Account Determination Without Wizard →<br />
Define Valuation Classes<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Note the account category reference assigned to each of the material types used in this case study.<br />
Verify details of:<br />
Material Material Type Account Category Description<br />
Type Description Reference<br />
HAWA Trading Goods 0005 Reference for trading goods<br />
HIBE Operating supplies 0002 Ref. for operating supplies<br />
(Exit)<br />
Click on the<br />
Verify details of:<br />
button.<br />
Valuation Account Category Description Description<br />
Class Reference<br />
3100 0005 Trading Goods Reference for trading goods<br />
3030 0002 Operating supplies Ref. for operating supplies<br />
Note of which valuation classes are linked to the account category references you noted from<br />
above.<br />
Why do Operating Supplies have more than one valuation class?<br />
(Exit Twice)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 123 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 96: Configure Automatic Postings for Goods Movement<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you establish the system settings controlling automatic postings to G/L accounts<br />
for Inventory Management and Invoice Verification transactions.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Materials Management → Valuation and Account Assignment →<br />
Account Determination → Account Determination Without Wizard →<br />
Configure Automatic Postings<br />
Trans Code<br />
The next few pages will have you create the automatic postings rules for the following transactions:<br />
Transaction Description Key<br />
Inventory Posting BSX<br />
Materials Management Small Differences DIF<br />
Offsetting Entry for Inventory Postings GBB<br />
Cost (price) Difference PRD<br />
GR/IR clearing account WRX<br />
If a box appears with other accounts, click the “Cancel” button.<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Inventory Posting<br />
Double click on Transaction Event Key BSX<br />
Chart of Accounts C_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Select Valuation modif.<br />
Select Valuation class<br />
(Save)<br />
Transaction Event Key BSX<br />
Enter the following automatic account assignments (use F4 to lookup the account number):<br />
Valuation +-<br />
Modifier<br />
Valuation Class Enter<br />
Account<br />
Number<br />
Account<br />
Name<br />
G_ _ _ 3100 Trading Goods Inventory Account<br />
G_ _ _ 3030 Operating Supplies Inventory<br />
(Save)<br />
(Back)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 124 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Offsetting Entry for Inventory Posting<br />
Double click on Transaction Event Key GBB<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Note: See the spreadsheet on the next page for additional information on Account Modifiers.<br />
Select General modification<br />
Select Valuation modif.<br />
Select Valuation class<br />
(Save)<br />
Transaction Event Key GBB<br />
Enter the following automatic account assignments (use F4 to lookup the account number):<br />
Valuation<br />
Modifier<br />
General<br />
Modification<br />
Valuation<br />
Class<br />
Enter<br />
Account<br />
Number<br />
Account<br />
Name<br />
G_ _ _ (Blank) 3030 Supplies Expense Account<br />
G_ _ _ (Blank) 3100 Trading Goods Consumption Account<br />
G_ _ _ VAX 3100 Cost of Goods Sold Expense<br />
G_ _ _ VBR 3030 Supplies Expense Account<br />
G_ _ _ VBR 3100 Trading Goods Expense Acct<br />
(Save)<br />
(Back)<br />
Cost (price) difference<br />
Double click on Transaction Event Key PRD<br />
Select Valuation modif.<br />
Select Valuation class<br />
(Save)<br />
Transaction Event Key PRD<br />
Enter the following automatic account assignments (use F4 to lookup the account number):<br />
Valuation Valuation Class Enter<br />
Account<br />
Modifier<br />
Account<br />
Number<br />
Name<br />
G_ _ _ 3030 Pur Price Dif Acct<br />
G_ _ _ 3100 Pur Price Dif Acct<br />
(Save)<br />
(Back)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 125 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Materials Management Small Differences<br />
Double click on Transaction Event Key DIF<br />
(Save)<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Enter the following automatic account assignments (F4 to lookup the account number):<br />
Enter<br />
Account<br />
Number<br />
(Save)<br />
(Back)<br />
Account<br />
Name<br />
Pur Price Dif Account<br />
Goods receipt / inv. receipt clearing acct<br />
Double click on Transaction Event Key WRX<br />
Select Valuation modif.<br />
Select Valuation class<br />
(Save)<br />
Transaction Event Key WRX<br />
Enter the following automatic account assignments (select the box and press F4 to lookup the<br />
account number):<br />
Valuation Valuation Class Enter<br />
Account<br />
Modifier<br />
Account<br />
Number<br />
Name<br />
G_ _ _ 3030 GR/IR Account<br />
G_ _ _ 3100 GR/IR Account<br />
(Save)<br />
(Exit back to the IMG Menu)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 126 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Transaction Event Key: GBB – Inventory Posting Offsetting Entries<br />
General<br />
Account<br />
Modifier<br />
Description of Usage of Account<br />
Modifier Key<br />
Goods Receipt From Purchase Order with<br />
Account Assignment – post to consumption<br />
(exp.>rev.) – i.e., non-inventory purchases<br />
AUF Goods Receipt From Production Order –<br />
post to production settlement<br />
BSA Goods Receipt Into Initial Stock – only used<br />
once for posting inventory off-set for initial<br />
stock data load<br />
INV MM Physical Inventory Posting – MM goods<br />
receipt for increase count in stock, goods<br />
issue for decrease count in stock<br />
WMS Physical Inventory Posting – WMS<br />
goods issue to difference (i.e., loss) for<br />
decrease count in stock, goods receipt from<br />
difference for increase count in stock<br />
VAX Goods Issue To Sales - post to Cost of<br />
Goods Sold (COGS)<br />
VAY Goods Issue To Sales for Consumption<br />
(e.g., goods issue to free sales samples)<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Material Movement Type<br />
101>102 GR from Purchase Order>Reverse<br />
101>102 GR from Production Order>Reverse<br />
122 RE return to order<br />
561>562 GR to Initial Stock<br />
Unrestricted>Reverse<br />
563>564 GR to Initial Stock Quality<br />
Insp>Reverse<br />
565>566 GR to Initial Stock Blocked>Reverse<br />
701>702 GR to Physical In. Unrestricted>GI<br />
from<br />
703>704 GR to Physical In. Quality I>GI from<br />
707>708 GR to Physical In. Blocked>GI from<br />
711>712 GI to Inventory diff.>GR from diff.<br />
713>714 GI to Inventory diff. QI>GR from diff.<br />
717>718 GI to Inventory diff. Blocked>GR from<br />
231>232 GI to Sales Order (MM)>Reverse MM<br />
531> GD, goods issue to delivery<br />
623>624 GI cust. Returnable<br />
packaging>Reverse<br />
633>634 GI customer consignment>Reverse<br />
531> GD, goods issue to delivery<br />
623>624 GI cust. Returnable<br />
packaging>Reverse<br />
633>634 GI customer consignment>Reverse<br />
641>642 TR to Stock in Transit Order>Reverse<br />
VBO Goods Issue To Subcontracting Stock 543>544 GI to Subcontracting Stock>Reverse<br />
VBR Goods Issue to Consumption - post to<br />
material consumption (i.e.,<br />
expense>revenue)<br />
(e.g., goods issue to job or production<br />
order)<br />
VNG Goods Issue to Scrap – post to scrapping<br />
material consumption (i.e.,<br />
expense>revenue)<br />
VQP Goods Issue to Sampling – post to sampling<br />
material consumption (i.e.,<br />
expense>revenue)<br />
ZOB Transfer Returns – Own (unrestricted) –<br />
post valuated returned stock from customer<br />
Goods Receipt w>o Purchase Order – post<br />
expense>revenue account as offset to<br />
inventory received without purchase order<br />
201>202 GI to Cost Center>Reverse<br />
221>222 GI to Project>Reverse<br />
251>252 GI to Sales>Reverse<br />
261>262 GI to Order>Reverse<br />
291>292 GI to All Acct. Assignments>Reverse<br />
401>402 TP Own from Sales Order>Reverse<br />
551>552 GI to Scrap Unrestricted>Reverse<br />
553>554 GI to Scrap Quality Insp.>Reverse<br />
555>556 GI to Scrap Blocked Stock>Reverse<br />
331>332 GI to Sampling Quality Insp.>Reverse<br />
333>334 GI to Sampling Unrestricted>Reverse<br />
453>454 TP Returns to Own>Reverse<br />
501>502 GR w>o P.O. to Unrestricted>Reverse<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 127 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 97: Configure Automatic Postings for Taxes<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you establish the system settings controlling automatic postings to G/L accounts<br />
for taxes.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings →<br />
Tax on Sales/Purchases → Posting → Define Tax Accounts<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Select Sales Tax 1 MW1<br />
(Choose)<br />
(Save)<br />
Account 320_ _ _<br />
(Save)<br />
(Back)<br />
Select Sales Tax 1 VS1<br />
(Choose)<br />
(Save)<br />
Account 321_ _ _<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit back to the IMG Menu)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 128 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 98: Set Parameters for Invoice Verification<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The objective of this exercise is to link the company code to the valuation elements within materials<br />
management. The Price Carry Over indicates whether price changes in the previous period or<br />
previous year are to affect the prices in the current period.<br />
If you do not select this field, the price changes in the previous period or previous year have no effect<br />
on the prices in the current period.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Materials Management → Valuation and Account Assignment →<br />
Configure Price Change in Previous Period<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
CoCd (Company Code) C_ _ _<br />
Check Price carr. over<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit back to the IMG Menu)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 129 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 99: Create Default Values for Invoice Verification<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is for you to maintain the default values for the tax codes used in invoice<br />
verification.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Materials Management → Logistics Invoice Verification → Incoming Invoice →<br />
Maintain Default Values for Tax Codes<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Defaults, domestic:<br />
Tax Code XI (“ex eye”)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit back to the IMG Menu)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 130 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Unit 12:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 12 is to test the integration of your Material Management and Financial Accounting<br />
systems. With both configured, it is time to create purchase orders for trading goods and operating<br />
supplies, receive the invoices and post payment to the vendors for goods provided to your company.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 131 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 100: Create Purchase Order for SLICK BIKES<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create a Purchase Order from a known supplier (SLICK BIKES).<br />
This is the first order and you need to evaluate their goods and timeliness of delivery.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order →<br />
Create → Vendor/Supplying Plant Known<br />
Trans Code ME21N<br />
In the Header section, click on the Org Data tab. If Purch Org and/or Company Code is MI00 and US00,<br />
change to P_ _ _ and C_ _ _.<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Vendor (# for SLICK BIKES)<br />
Material Quantity Delivery Date Net Price Currency<br />
HELM_ _ _ 50 (Future date) 6.50 USD<br />
ULOK _ _ _ 25 (Future date) 12.50 USD<br />
PUMP _ _ _ 80 (Future date) 4.29 USD<br />
(Header)<br />
Conditions Tab<br />
Record the total value of the Purchase order $__________<br />
(Save)<br />
<br />
Save past the message indicating that no output device (ie. Printer, FAX) was found to communicate<br />
this PO to the vendor.<br />
Record Purchase Order Number _________________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 132 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 101: Create Purchase Order for PREMIER BIKES<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you create a Purchase Order from a known supplier (PREMIER BIKES). This is<br />
the first order and you need to evaluate their goods and timeliness of delivery.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code ME21N<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order →<br />
Create → Vendor/Supplying Plant Known<br />
Vendor (# for PREMIER BIKES)<br />
Material Quantity Delivery Date Net Price Currency<br />
ULOK_ _ _ 50 (Future date) 13.00 USD<br />
SADL _ _ _ 10 (Future date) 23.00 USD<br />
(Header)<br />
Conditions Tab<br />
Record the total value of the Purchase order $__________<br />
(Save)<br />
<br />
Save past the message indicating that no output device (ie. Printer, FAX) was found to communicate<br />
this PO to the vendor.<br />
Record Purchase Order Number _________________________ premier<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 133 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 102: Create Purchase Order for Advanced Cycling Ltd.<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create a Purchase Order from a known supplier (Advanced Cycling<br />
Ltd.). This is the first order and you need to evaluate their goods and timeliness of delivery.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code ME21N<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order →<br />
Create → Vendor/Supplying Plant Known<br />
Vendor (# for Advanced Cycling Ltd.)<br />
Material Quantity Delivery Date Net Price Currency<br />
HELM_ _ _ 50 (Future date) 7.00 USD<br />
SADL _ _ _ 5 (Future date) 23.50 USD<br />
(Header)<br />
Conditions Tab<br />
Record the total value of the Purchase order $__________<br />
(Save)<br />
<br />
Save past the message indicating that no output device (ie. Printer, FAX) was found to communicate<br />
this PO to the vendor.<br />
Record Purchase Order Number _________________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 134 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 103: Create a Goods Receipts for the Purchase Orders<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to receive the stock items into inventory that were ordered from the<br />
three vendors.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MIGO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →<br />
Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order →<br />
GR for Purchase Order (MIGO)<br />
System Menu: Settings → Default Values<br />
Select Propose the OK Function in Future<br />
Select Propose All Items<br />
(Adopt)<br />
(Continue)<br />
Enter the PO number 4500000???( next to the Purchase order field)<br />
(Execute)<br />
Ensure each line item OK is checked<br />
SLoc (Storage Location) 10 (Inventory)<br />
Select or (Save)<br />
Repeat exercise and receive the goods for all three PO’s individually.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Purchase order Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 135 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 104: Create an Invoice Receipts from Vendors<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to record the information from the invoice sent to you by the vendor.<br />
The following vendor invoices for the stock items ordered should be entered.<br />
INVOICE #567 (Today’s date) SLICK BIKES<br />
ITEMS: QUANTITY PER PRICE:<br />
HELM _ _ _ 50 $6.50 $325.00<br />
ULOK _ _ _ 25 $12.50 $312.50<br />
PUMP _ _ _ 80 $4.29 $343.20<br />
TOTAL $980.70<br />
Thank you for your order<br />
INVOICE #3245 (Today’s date) PREMIER BIKES<br />
ITEMS: QUANTITY PER PRICE:<br />
ULOK_ _ _ 50 $13.00 $650.00<br />
SADL _ _ _ 10 $23.00 $ 230.00<br />
__________<br />
TOTAL $880.00<br />
Thank you for your order<br />
INVOICE #7890 (Today’s date) Advanced Cycling<br />
Ltd.<br />
ITEMS: QUANTITY PER PRICE:<br />
HELM_ _ _ 50 $7.00 $350.00<br />
SADL _ _ _ 5 $23.50 $117.50<br />
__________<br />
TOTAL $467.50<br />
Thank you for your order<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MIRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Logistics Invoice Verification →<br />
Document Entry → Enter Invoice<br />
Basic data Tab<br />
Invoice date Today's date<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Purchase Order (Enter your purchase order number)<br />
Jurisd. Code CA0000000<br />
(Enter)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 136 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Enter amount: $ 980.70 (or whatever the amount from the physical<br />
invoice above)<br />
(Enter)<br />
Use the button to see if the postings are correct.<br />
Verify details of:<br />
GL<br />
Account<br />
Description Amount Comments<br />
Verify details of:<br />
GL<br />
Account<br />
Description Amount Comments<br />
Verify details of:<br />
GL<br />
Account<br />
Description Amount Comments<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Purchase order Vendor Invoice # Message<br />
(Back)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 137 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 105: Post Payments to Vendors<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise it to make payment to the vendors for the goods received. You will post a<br />
payment to each of the three vendors from which you have purchase trading goods.<br />
Since the invoices are due for payment now. You are requested to clear the invoices by posting<br />
outgoing payments to the vendors using the bank account (100_ _ _) of your chart of accounts.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code F-53<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Document Entry →<br />
Outgoing Payment → Post<br />
Document Date Today’s date<br />
Bank data<br />
Account 100_ _ _ (Bank – Checking)<br />
Amount Enter the amount you are going to pay<br />
Open items selection<br />
Account (# for SLICK BIKES_ _ _)<br />
All other settings remain unchanged.<br />
Select<br />
Review the balance. Choose the invoice you wish to make payment against by double clicking on the<br />
USD Gross amount. Ensure “Not assigned” field equals zero.<br />
(Save)<br />
Repeat this process for the other two vendors<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Purchase order Vendor Invoice # Message<br />
(Exit back to the Easy Access Menu)<br />
Select<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 138 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 106: Display Vendor Line Items<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Account →<br />
Display/Change Line Items<br />
Vendor selection<br />
Vendor (Enter the vendor number range from the lowest to the highest)<br />
Company code C_ _ _<br />
Line item selection<br />
Select All items<br />
(Execute)<br />
Review for Open items<br />
(Exit back to the IMG Menu)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 139 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Unit 13:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 13 is to have you run Material Requirements Planning to generate a purchase<br />
requisition that you will convert to a purchase order. Following conversion of the requisition you will<br />
change the quantity and complete the purchasing (procurement) cycle.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 140 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 107: Create Purchase Outline Agreement (Contract) for<br />
Stock Items<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create a contract for the premium pen from PREMIER BIKES for 100<br />
pens in the next three months.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code ME31K<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Outline Agreement →<br />
Contract → Create<br />
Vendor (# for PREMIER BIKES)<br />
Agreement Type MK (Quantity Contract)<br />
(Enter)<br />
Administrative Fields<br />
Validity end (3 months from today)<br />
(Overview)<br />
Outline Agreement Items<br />
Material SADL_ _ _<br />
Targ. Qty 300<br />
Net Price $22.00<br />
SLoc 10<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
No message record could be found for output of message.<br />
Select to accept the message.<br />
Record Contract Number: ______________________________<br />
(Exit back to the Easy Access Menu)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 141 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 108: Run Material Requirements Planning – Single Item,<br />
Single Level<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to allow the system to plan the availability and requirements for the<br />
premium pen.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MD03<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Materials Requirements Planning (MRP) →<br />
MRP → Planning → Single-Item, Single-Level<br />
Material SADL_ _ _<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
MRP control parameters<br />
<strong>Process</strong>ing key NETCH<br />
Create purchase req 2<br />
Delivery schedules 3<br />
Create MRP list 1<br />
Planning mode 1<br />
Scheduling 1<br />
Display results before they are saved<br />
Select Display results before they are saved<br />
(Enter)<br />
A warning message appears - please check input parameters<br />
(Enter) again to confirm and check the warning message<br />
Review the MRP list<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit back to the Easy Access Menu)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 142 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 109: Convert Proposed Purchase Requisition to Purchase<br />
Order<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
In this exercise you will accept the system generated replenishment proposal for SADL_ _ _. After you<br />
have adopted the system proposal you will increase the quantity to 100 for SADL_ _ _.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MD04<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Materials Requirements Planning (MRP) →<br />
MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Reqmts List<br />
Individual access Tab<br />
Material SADL_ _ _<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Double click the MRP element PurRqs<br />
(Change Element)<br />
Item Overview section<br />
Delivery Date Today’s Date<br />
Stor. Loc. 10<br />
Item section<br />
Source of Supply Tab<br />
<br />
Select your line with your contract number (Info/agmt. 460000####)<br />
<br />
Item Overview section<br />
Quantity 50<br />
(Save)<br />
Double click the MRP element PurRqs<br />
to convert the MRP generated purchase requisition to a PO.<br />
Vendor (# for PREMIER BIKES)<br />
(Enter)<br />
In the Document Overview window on left side of screen<br />
Click once on Open Requisitions<br />
(Adopt)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 143 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
(Item overview)<br />
(Header)<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Conditions Tab<br />
Record the value of the Purchase Order Gross Price $ __________________<br />
(Save)<br />
<br />
Record the Purchase Order Number _______________________________<br />
(Refresh)<br />
You should see the MRP Element Data changes to your Purchase Order Number<br />
(Exit back to the Easy Access Menu)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 144 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 110: Review Outline Agreements<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
Review the outline agreement you assigned to the purchase order.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code ME3N<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Outline Agreements →<br />
List Displays → By Agreement Number<br />
Purchasing document Leave Blank<br />
Purchasing organization P _ _ _<br />
(Execute)<br />
Examine your open target quantity<br />
(Exit back to the Easy Access Menu)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 145 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 111: Create a Goods Receipt<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to receive the pens into inventory.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MIGO_GR<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →<br />
Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order →<br />
GR for Purchase Order (MIGO)<br />
Purchase Order 4500000???<br />
(Execute)<br />
Once executed you should see the purchase order appear in the My Documents list on the left of the<br />
screen, the document you are working with should be highlight in red.<br />
Ensure each line item OK is checked<br />
Make sure you have entered your storage location<br />
Select or (Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit back to the Easy Access Menu)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 146 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 112: Create an Invoice Receipt from Vendor<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to record the invoice sent by the vendor for the PO for the pens<br />
ordered.<br />
PREMIER BIKES, Inc. INVOICE #203-45879<br />
Navigation<br />
ITEMS: QUANTITY PER PRICE:<br />
SADL _ _ _ 100 $ 22.00 $ 2200.00<br />
__________<br />
TOTAL $2200.00<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MIRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Logistics Invoice Verification →<br />
Document Entry → Enter Invoice<br />
Basic data Tab<br />
Invoice date Today's date<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Currency (behind amount) USD<br />
Purchase Order (Enter your purchase order number)<br />
(Enter)<br />
Enter amount: $ 2200 (from the physical invoice)<br />
Tax code: XI<br />
Jurisd. Code CA0000000<br />
(Enter)<br />
Use the button to see if the postings are correct.<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit back to the Easy Access Menu)<br />
We appreciate your business<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 147 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 113: Post Payment to Vendor<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise has you post payment to the vendor for the pens. Since the invoice for PREMIER BIKES<br />
is due for payment. You are requested to clear the invoice amount by posting an outgoing payment<br />
using the bank account (100_ _ _).<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code F-53<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Document Entry →<br />
Outgoing Payment → Post<br />
Document Date Today’s date<br />
Bank data<br />
Account 100_ _ _ (Bank - Checking)<br />
Amount $ 2200<br />
Text Invoice # 203-45879<br />
Open items selection<br />
Account (for PREMIER BIKES _ _ _)<br />
All other settings remain unchanged.<br />
Select<br />
Review the balance. Choose the invoice you wish to make payment against by double clicking on the<br />
GBP Gross amount. Ensure “Not assigned” field equals zero.<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit back to the Easy Access Menu)<br />
Select<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 148 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Unit 14:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 14 is to create the organizational structure necessary to carry out the customer<br />
order management functions of your company.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 149 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 114: Create Sales Organization<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you create the Sales Organization. This is the highest level organizational<br />
structure in Sales and Distribution. Your pen company will have one Sales Organization.<br />
The sales organization is the unit or structure responsible for the terms and conditions for the sale of<br />
products or services.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Sales and Distribution →<br />
Define, copy, delete, check sales organization<br />
Trans Code<br />
Double click on: Define Sales Organization.<br />
Select<br />
Sales Organization S_ _ _<br />
Description Global Bikes Inc. Sales _ _ _<br />
Detailed information<br />
Address text name ADRS_SENDER<br />
Letter header text ADRS_HEADER<br />
Footer lines text ADRS_FOOTER<br />
Greeting text name ADRS_SIGNATURE<br />
Sales org.calendar US<br />
Rebate proc.active Checked<br />
Select the address button<br />
Postal Code 57069<br />
City Vermillion<br />
Country US<br />
Region SD<br />
Language English<br />
(Copy<br />
(Save)<br />
(Copy) verify the address information.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
(Cancel)<br />
(Alternative Option)<br />
Select UE00<br />
(Copy As)<br />
Sales Organization S_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 150 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 115: Assign Sales Organization to Company Code<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will tie your Sales Organization to Finance Accounting (FI) by assigning it to your<br />
Company Code.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Sales and Distribution →<br />
Assign sales organization to company code<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Select your sales organization S_ _ _<br />
Assign it to your company code C_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 151 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 116: Define Distribution Channels<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you review the two distribution channels you will be using. Since distribution<br />
channels are created at the client level, once they are create everyone has access to them for use in<br />
their own organizational structure. Distribution channels are used to define the way in which products<br />
or services reach your customer.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Sales and Distribution →<br />
Define, copy delete, check distribution channel<br />
Trans Code<br />
*The instructor, as a demonstration will complete this task.<br />
All students will use these Distribution Channels throughout the remainder of the course.<br />
Students, skip this exercise<br />
Double Click on Define distribution channel<br />
Select<br />
Create distribution channels<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
(Cancel)<br />
RE Retail<br />
WH Wholesale<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 152 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 117: Assign Distribution Channels to Sales Organization<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise has you assign the different ways in which your products reach your customer to your<br />
Sales Organization.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Sales and Distribution →<br />
Assign distribution channel to sales organization<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
<br />
SOrg S_ _ _<br />
DChl RE<br />
Next Line<br />
SOrg S_ _ _<br />
DChl WH<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
If distribution channels WH and RE do not appear, notify the instructor to run exercise 116<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 153 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 118: Define Common Distribution Channels<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise is to define distribution channels which have common master data. The allocation is valid<br />
within a sales organization.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Define Common Distribution Channels<br />
Trans Code<br />
Review only, all data should be preset. Check for your entry, if it is there then (Exit)<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Locate your Sales Organizations<br />
First Line (DChl RE)<br />
DCh-Conds RE<br />
DCh-Cust/Mt<br />
Next Line (DChl: WH)<br />
RE<br />
DCh-Conds WH<br />
DCh-Cust/Mt WH<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 154 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 119: Define Division<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you review the division you will be using. Since divisions are created at the<br />
client level, once they are create everyone has access to them for use in their own organizational<br />
structure. Divisions are a way of grouping materials, products, or services. A product can exist in only<br />
one division. It is a way in which you could further divide you distribution channels if you desired to do<br />
so.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Logistics – General →<br />
Define, copy, delete, check division<br />
Trans Code<br />
*The instructor, as a demonstration will complete this task.<br />
All students will use this Division throughout the remainder of the course.<br />
Students: Skip this exercise<br />
Double Click on Define Division<br />
Select<br />
Create Division<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
(Cancel)<br />
01 General Products<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 155 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 120: Assign Division to Sales Organization<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you tie your Divisions, or groupings of materials, to your Sales Organization.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Sales and Distribution →<br />
Assign division to sales organization<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
<br />
SOrg: S_ _ _<br />
Dv: 01<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
If division 01 does not appear, have instructor run exercise 119<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 156 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 121: Define Common Divisions<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise is to define the divisions that common master data should apply to. The definition is valid<br />
within each sales organization.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Define Common Division<br />
Trans Code<br />
This is a review of the entries only. If the data is correct, then exit. Otherwise, enter the correct data.<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Locate your Sales Organization<br />
DivCon: 01<br />
Div-Cus: 01<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 157 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 122: Set up Sales Areas<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you create Sales Areas. Sales Areas are made up of a Sales Organization, a<br />
Distribution Channel and a Division. Sales Areas are crucial in pricing.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Sales and Distribution →<br />
Set up sales area<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Assign all the Distribution channels and Divisions to your Sales Organization as follows:<br />
<br />
SOrg S_ _ _<br />
DChl RE<br />
Dv 01<br />
Next Line<br />
SOrg S_ _ _<br />
DChl WH<br />
Dv 01<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 158 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 123: Define Loading Groups<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to have you review the loading groups that have been established.<br />
Loading Groups are created at the client level and once created are available for all to use.<br />
Loading groups are a way of grouping of materials that share the same loading requirements. They<br />
are also used in determining the shipping point in a plant.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Logistics Execution → Shipping → Basic Shipping Functions →<br />
Shipping Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination →<br />
Define Loading Groups<br />
Trans Code<br />
*The instructor, as a demonstration will complete this task.<br />
These loading groups will be available to all users on this client.<br />
This is a review of the entries only.<br />
Select<br />
First Entry<br />
LGrp Hand<br />
Description Load by Hand<br />
Second Entry<br />
LGrp Cart<br />
Description Handcart<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 159 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 124: Create Shipping Point<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise has you create a shipping point within your plant. A shipping point is a physical location<br />
inside your plant, from which you will ship items. Based on different loading and/or shipping<br />
requirements, you can create one or more shipping points to meet your business requirements.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Logistics Execution →<br />
Define, copy, delete, check shipping point<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Double click on “Define shipping point”<br />
Select<br />
Shipping Point S_ _ _<br />
Shipping Point Description Shipping Point _ _ _<br />
Times<br />
Factory Calendar US<br />
Leave all other fields blank.<br />
Select (Address)<br />
Street Address<br />
Postal Code 57069<br />
City Vermillion<br />
Country US<br />
Region SD<br />
(Copy).<br />
(Save)<br />
(Copy) …to verify the address information.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
(Cancel)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 160 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 125: Assign Plant to Sales Organization and Distribution<br />
Channel<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will enable the integration between the Material Management (MM) and the Sales and<br />
Distribution (SD) modules. You will need to assign your plant to all combinations of a Sales<br />
Organization and a Distribution Channel.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Sales and Distribution →<br />
Assign sales organization – distribution channel – plant<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
<br />
SOrg: S_ _ _<br />
DChCust/Mt: RE<br />
Plnt: P_ _ _<br />
Next Line<br />
SOrg: S_ _ _<br />
DChCust/Mt: WH<br />
Plnt: P_ _ _<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 161 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 126: Assign Shipping Point to Plant<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to assign your shipping point to your plant. A shipping point can only<br />
exist in one plant. However, a plant can have many shipping points. The number of shipping points<br />
will be dependent on your business requirements. Remember that a shipping point is a physical<br />
location within a plant from which items are shipped.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Logistics Execution →<br />
Assign shipping point to plant<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Select your plant by double-clicking P_ _ _<br />
From the pop-up window, select YOUR shipping point to be assigned to your plant<br />
(Copy)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 162 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Unit 15:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 15 is to create additional master data needed for conducting the customer order<br />
management cycle. This will include creating the additional views needed for the material master,<br />
creating additional General Ledger accounts, creating customers and assigning a pricing procedure.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 163 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 127: Create Sales Views for Trading Goods<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you create (extend) the trading good materials created in earlier material<br />
management exercises. These new views for the material masters must now be created (extended) to<br />
include the sales views in order to make the materials available for sale.<br />
Additionally, materials must have sales views created (extended) for both distribution channels where<br />
they will be sold; RE and WH.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Products → Material →<br />
Trading Goods → Create<br />
Trans Code MMH1<br />
Defaults → Organization levels… Copy from…<br />
Company Code C_ _ _ C_ _ _<br />
Plant P_ _ _ P_ _ _<br />
Sales Org S_ _ _ S_ _ _<br />
Distr Channel* RE RE<br />
(Company code may not appear in version ECC 6.04)<br />
(Continue)<br />
System Menu: Defaults → Views…<br />
Select the views: Sales: Sales Org. Data 1<br />
Sales: Sales Org. Data 2<br />
Sales: General/Plant Data<br />
(Continue)<br />
Material HELM_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Sales: Sales org. 1 Tab<br />
General data<br />
Division 01 (General Products)<br />
Delivering Plant P__ _<br />
Tax data<br />
Tax Jurisdiction Code UTXJ 0 (Exempt)<br />
County Sales Tax UTX2 0 (Exempt)<br />
City Sales Tax UTX3 0 (Exempt)<br />
(Enter)<br />
Sales: sales org. 2 Tab<br />
Grouping terms<br />
Mat. Statistics Group 1 (“A” material)<br />
(Enter)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 164 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Sales: General/Plant Tab<br />
Shipping data (time in days)<br />
Trans. grp.: 0001 Pallets (for route determination)<br />
Loading Grp.: HAND Load by Hand (for shipping point determination)<br />
(If HAND does not appear, have instructor run exercise 123)<br />
(Save)*<br />
Complete for the other materials that you sell using the same settings as HELM_ _ _:<br />
ULOK_ _ _<br />
SADL_ _ _<br />
PUMP_ _ _<br />
Repeat this process for each material that you will sell in the Distribution channel: WH<br />
*Remember to change the defaults from RE and create the WH views for all the materials<br />
Hint: To expedite the Sales view creation process use the “copy” method by entering a material (that<br />
has already been extended) in the “Copy from…” field. Then continue as instructed, noticing that the<br />
initial materials data defaults into the new materials fields.<br />
(Save after each material)<br />
Record the system messages:<br />
Material Created/Extended Created/Extended<br />
HELM_ _ _<br />
ULOK_ _ _<br />
SADL_ _ _<br />
PUMP_ _ _<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 165 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 128: Create Sales Revenue Account<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you create the two general ledger accounts you will need to record revenues<br />
and discounts from revenues.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FS00<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account 600_ _ _<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Profit & Loss Accounts<br />
Select Radio Button P&L statement acct<br />
Description<br />
Short text Sales Revenue<br />
G/L acct long text Sales Revenue<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Account currency USD<br />
Posting without tax allowed Selected<br />
Account management in company code<br />
Check Line item display<br />
Sort key 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
Check “Post automatically only”<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 166 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 129: Create Sales Revenue Deductions Account<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
To process billing we will need Profit & Loss Statement accounts for Sales Revenue and Sales<br />
Discounts<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account 610_ _ _<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Profit & Loss Accounts<br />
Select Radio Button P&L statement acct<br />
Description<br />
Short text Revenue Deductions<br />
G/L acct long text Revenue Deductions<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Account currency USD<br />
Posting without tax allowed Selected<br />
Account management in company code<br />
Check Line item display<br />
Sort key 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
Check “Post automatically only”<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 167 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 130: Review Sold-to, Ship-to, Payer & Bill-to Account<br />
Groups<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise is to have you review the different account groups that you will use to create your<br />
customers. Account groups control the data required to create customers (business partners)<br />
This is a review only exercise (Do not change or save).<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable →<br />
Customer Accounts → Master Data →<br />
Preparations for Creating Customer Master Data →<br />
Define Account Groups with Screen Layout (Customers)<br />
Trans Code<br />
(Change-->Display)<br />
Select 0001 - Sold-to Parties<br />
(Details)<br />
Select General Data<br />
Select<br />
Review the required fields by double clicking on the various groups<br />
(Back)<br />
Select Company code data<br />
Select<br />
Review the required fields of the various groups<br />
(Back)<br />
Select Sales data<br />
Select<br />
Review the required fields of the various groups<br />
(Back) Twice<br />
Select 0002 – Goods Recipient (Ship-to)<br />
(Details)<br />
Select General Data<br />
Select<br />
Review the required fields of the various groups<br />
(Back)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 168 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 131: Create Customer<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to have you create customers. You have already created business<br />
partners (Vendors) in both Financial Accounting (FI) and Material Management (MM). Since you are in<br />
the Sales and Distribution (SD) module now, you will create general, company code (FI) and sales and<br />
distribution (SD) views for your customers. When you created vendors you could create them centrally<br />
– this created all three views from a single point. The same functionality is available for customers. In<br />
Sales and Distribution (SD) it is called “Create Complete” indicating that you want to create the General<br />
Data, Company Code (FI) and Sales and Distribution views at the same time.<br />
In this exercise you will create five customers. Three of these will be in your retail distribution channel<br />
and two will exist in your wholesale distribution channel.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code XD01<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → <strong>Business</strong> Partner →<br />
Customer → Create → Complete<br />
Account group Sold-to party<br />
Customer (Leave blank)<br />
Company code C_ _ _<br />
Sales Area<br />
Sales Organization S_ _ _<br />
Distribution Channel as listed below for each customer<br />
Division 01<br />
(Continue)<br />
You will create the following customers:<br />
• Brewers Bikes and Leasing – Milwaukee, WI 53202 Dist.Ch: RE (Customer and Vendor)<br />
• Sierra Nevada Peddlers – Chico, CA 95926 Dist.Ch: RE<br />
• SAP, America – Newtown Square, PA 19073 Dist.Ch: RE<br />
• River City Racers– Sacramento, CA 95814 Dist.Ch: WH<br />
• Pleasure Bikes Buying Group – Miami, FL 33010 Dist.Ch: WH<br />
Address TAB:<br />
Name<br />
Name: Customer’s name (see above list)<br />
Search term<br />
Search Term: _ _ _<br />
Street Address<br />
Postal Code: Customer’s zip code<br />
City: Customer’s city<br />
Country: US<br />
Region: Customer's State<br />
Transportation zone Enter appropriate Transportation zone (used for route determination)<br />
Communication<br />
Language: English<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 169 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Control data TAB (only when creating for Brewers Bikes leasing):<br />
Account control<br />
Vendor Enter the vendor number for Brewers Bikes leasing – remember that<br />
Brewers Bikes leasing is not only a customer but also a vendor<br />
Select (Financial Accounting)<br />
Account Management TAB:<br />
Accounting Information<br />
Recon. account Enter your A/R reconciliation account number (110_ _ _)<br />
Sort key 001 (posting date)<br />
Payment transactions TAB:<br />
Payment Data<br />
Terms of payment 0001 (Payable immediately, Due net)<br />
Select<br />
Sales TAB:<br />
Sales order<br />
Currency: USD<br />
Pricing/Statistics<br />
Cust.pric.proc. 1 (standard)<br />
Cust. Stats. Grp 1 “A” material. (helps determine which data are updated in the LIS)<br />
Shipping TAB:<br />
Shipping<br />
Delivery priority 02 (normal item)<br />
Order Combination Selected (default)<br />
Shipping Conditions 01 (standard)<br />
Delivering Plant P_ _ _<br />
Partial deliveries<br />
Partial delivery per item C (Only complete delivery allowed)<br />
Max.part.deliveries 3 (9 is the default)<br />
Billing Document TAB:<br />
Delivery and payment terms<br />
Incoterms FOB, Origin Shipping Dock (note the both are necessary)<br />
Terms of Payment 0001<br />
Accounting<br />
Acct assgmt group 01 (Domestic Revenues)<br />
Taxes<br />
Tax Classification 0 (for all 3 tax categories)<br />
(Save)<br />
Repeat for each of the new customers and record their customer numbers.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Customer Customer Number<br />
Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC<br />
SAP, America<br />
River City Racers, Inc.<br />
Pleasure Bikes Buying Group<br />
Brewers Bikes Leasing<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 170 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 132: Create Ship-to party<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
In this exercise you will create an alternative ship-to location or goods recipient. SAP, America has an<br />
organization to which they wish to have you ship directly. This new ship-to or goods recipient party is<br />
SAP, America – UAP (University Alliance Program). In order to do this you will create a specific ship-to<br />
customer for this separate address.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → <strong>Business</strong> Partners →<br />
Customer → Create → Complete<br />
Account group Goods Receipt<br />
Customer (Leave blank)<br />
Company code C_ _ _<br />
Sales Area<br />
Sales Organization S_ _ _<br />
Distribution Channel RE<br />
Division 01<br />
(Continue)<br />
Address TAB:<br />
Name<br />
Name SAP, America – UAP<br />
Search term<br />
Search term _ _ _<br />
Street Address<br />
Postal Code 19073<br />
City Newtown Square<br />
Country US<br />
Region PA<br />
Transportation zone 000000001<br />
Communication<br />
Language English<br />
Select (Financial Accounting)<br />
Account Management TAB:<br />
Accounting Information<br />
Recon. account Enter your A/R reconciliation account number (110_ _ _)<br />
Sort key 001 (posting date)<br />
Payment Transactions TAB:<br />
Payment data<br />
Terms of payment 0001 (Payable immediately, Due net)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 171 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Select<br />
Shipping TAB:<br />
Shipping<br />
Delivery Priority 02 (normal item)<br />
Order Combination Selected (default)<br />
Shipping Conditions 01 (standard)<br />
Delivering Plant P_ _ _<br />
Partial deliveries<br />
Max. partial deliveries 3 (9 is the default)<br />
Partial delivery per item C “Only complete delivery allowed”<br />
Billing Document TAB:<br />
Taxes<br />
Tax Classification 0 (for all 3 tax categories)<br />
(Save)<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Customer Customer Number<br />
SAP, America - UAP<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 172 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 133: Assign Ship-to party to Customer<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
In this exercise you will assign the newly created good recipient to the sold-to party created in an<br />
earlier exercise. Please note that the purpose of this exercise is to end up with an additional ship-to<br />
party – not to replace the old ship-to party with a new one. You will complete this by changing the<br />
original SAP, America customer by adding SAP, America – UAP customer as an additional ship-to<br />
party on the Partner Functions Tab of the sold-to party.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code XD02<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → <strong>Business</strong> Partners →<br />
Customer → Change → Complete<br />
Customer: Customer # for SAP, America<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Sales area<br />
Sales Organization S_ _ _<br />
Distribution channel RE<br />
Division 01<br />
(Continue)<br />
Select (if needed)<br />
Partner Functions TAB:<br />
Partner Functions<br />
Partner function (add new line) SH (Ship-to party)<br />
Number Customer # for SAP, America - UAP<br />
(Enter)<br />
“Ship to Party” and the name will appear.<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 173 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Unit 16:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 16 is to define prices for materials, specific customer prices, and discounts. In this<br />
unit you will also establish credit limits for your customers and define those material stocks that will be<br />
considered when you are conducting an availability check for a sales order.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 174 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 134: Create Material Prices<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
In this exercise you will create material prices that any customer would pay. In determining price this<br />
would be the last price that would be used to determine pricing for an item.<br />
Prices are defined by Sales Organization and Distribution Channel.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VK31<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Conditions → Create →<br />
Prices → Material Price<br />
Enter the following information to set up retail prices:<br />
Select Cnty SOrg. DChl Material ReSt<br />
Sales Organization S_ _ _<br />
Distribution Channel RE<br />
Enter the following material and pricing information:<br />
(Co) Condition Material Amount<br />
PR00 HELM_ _ _ $ 10.90<br />
PR00 ULOK_ _ _ $ 18.35<br />
PR00 SADL_ _ _ $ 46.95<br />
PR00 PUMP_ _ _ $ 8.49<br />
(Enter)<br />
The system will automatically enter the material descriptions, units of measure, and validity dates.<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Enter the following information to set up wholesale prices:<br />
Double click on<br />
Select Cnty SOrg. DChl Material ReSt<br />
Sales Organization S _ _ _<br />
Distribution Channel WH<br />
Refer the table on the next page…<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 175 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Enter the following material and pricing information:<br />
(Co) Condition Material Amount<br />
PR00 HELM_ _ _ $ 7.50<br />
PR00 ULOK_ _ _ $ 14.95<br />
PR00 SADL_ _ _ $ 35.50<br />
PR00 PUMP_ _ _ $ 6.99<br />
(Enter)<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
The system will automatically enter the material descriptions, units of measure, and validity dates.<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 176 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 135: Create Customer Specific Material Price<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
In this exercise you will create a special price that a specific customer receives for a specified validity<br />
period.<br />
This allows you to create special customer/material pricing.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VK31<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Conditions → Create →<br />
Prices → Individual Prices<br />
Select CnTy SOrg. DChl Customer Material ReSt<br />
Sales Organization S_ _ _<br />
Distribution Channel RE<br />
Customer SAP, America<br />
Enter the following material and pricing information:<br />
(Co) Condition Material Amount Valid From Valid to<br />
PR00 ULOK_ _ _ $ 17.50 Today’s Date 3 months from today<br />
PR00 SADL_ _ _ $ 42.95 Today’s Date 3 months from today<br />
(Enter)<br />
The system will automatically enter the material descriptions and units of measure<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 177 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 136: Create Customer Discount<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to show how a customer specific discount is created.<br />
This also serves to introduce you to the concept of a pricing scale.<br />
This condition type is currently set for Item condition (line item), but could be changed to Header<br />
condition in configuration. If it is set to a Header condition, the discount would apply to the order as a<br />
whole rather than to the individual line items in the order.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VK31<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Conditions → Create →<br />
Discounts/Surcharges → By Customer<br />
Select CnTy SOrg. DChl Customer ReSt<br />
Sales Organization S_ _ _<br />
Distribution Channel WH<br />
Customer with Release Status<br />
(Co) Condition K007<br />
Customer River City Racers, Inc.<br />
(Enter)<br />
Select K007 line<br />
Click on the scales button to give the customer a discount of 5% for order values between<br />
$1,000.00 and $1,999.99 and a discount of 8% for order values between $2,000.00 and $2,999.99<br />
and a discount of 10% for orders larger than $2,999.99.<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
Scale value 500.00 Amount 5<br />
Scale value 1000.00 Amount 8<br />
Scale value 1500.00 Amount 10<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 178 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 137: Establish Credit Limit for Customers<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to establish credit limits for your customers. Each customer has an<br />
established credit limit. How the system reacts to a customer that has exceeded the credit limit you<br />
established is determined in configuration. The current setting is to provide a warning message, but<br />
not stop the processing of an order or delivery.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code FD32<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Credit Management → Master Data →<br />
Change<br />
Customer Customer # for Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC<br />
Credit control area C_ _ _<br />
Check the following Overview<br />
Central Data<br />
Status<br />
(Enter)<br />
Page forward to:<br />
Customer Credit Management Change: Central Data<br />
Maximum permitted credit limits<br />
Total amount 35000<br />
Individual limit 35000<br />
Currency USD<br />
Customer Credit Management Change: Status<br />
Credit limit data<br />
Credit Limit 35000<br />
(Save)<br />
Repeat this for the other four customers (amounts need to be in all three places).<br />
Customer Credit limit Currency<br />
Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC $ 35,000 USD<br />
SAP, America $ 45,000 USD<br />
River City Racers, Inc. $ 22,500 USD<br />
Pleasure Bikes Buying Group $ 25,000 USD<br />
Brewers Bikes leasing $ 11,000 USD<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 179 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Unit 17:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 16 is to complete some final details necessary to prepare you for the<br />
comprehensive system test that begins in the next unit. This unit will have you create some specialized<br />
master data as well as complete the final configuration steps of shipping point and revenue account<br />
assignment determinations.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 180 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 138: Assign Sales Areas to Pricing Procedure<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to link your sales area to a pricing procedure. The RVAJUS pricing<br />
procedure is the standard USA pricing procedure with jurisdiction code. The pricing procedure which<br />
will be discussed in detail in the next unit is the manner in which prices are assigned to individual line<br />
items in your order as well as discounts, surcharges, etc.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Pricing → Pricing Control →<br />
Define and Assign Pricing Procedures<br />
Trans Code<br />
Double click on Define Pricing Procedure Determination<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Select<br />
Verify details of:<br />
SOrg DChl Dv DoPr CuPP PriPr<br />
S_ _ _ RE 01 A 1 RVAJUS<br />
S_ _ _ WH 01 A 1 RVAJUS<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
(Cancel)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 181 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 139: Define Availability Check for Sales Orders<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you review the stocks that are to be included when you conduct and availability<br />
check at time of inquiry, quotation, order, delivery, etc. This is completed at the client level and as such<br />
you will only need to review this. It is important to note the type of stock and their status as to whether<br />
or not they are considered during the availability check.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions →<br />
Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements → Availability Check →<br />
Availability Check with ATP Logic or Against Planning →<br />
Carry Out Control for Availability Check<br />
Trans Code<br />
*The instructor, as a demonstration will complete this task.<br />
This availability check rule will be available to all users on this client.<br />
The instructor will complete the following information:<br />
Select 02 for A (SD orders)<br />
Select (Display)<br />
Replenishment Lead time<br />
Deselect Check without RLT<br />
(Back Twice)<br />
Student select 02 for A (SD orders)<br />
Select (Display)<br />
(Back Twice)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 182 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 140: Assign Sales and Delivery Documents to Credit Check<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to assign sales and delivery documents to a Credit Check.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions →<br />
Credit Management/Risk Management → Credit Management →<br />
Assign Sales Documents and Delivery Documents<br />
Trans Code<br />
Verify the following information<br />
Double click on Credit limit check for order types<br />
For Order type OR<br />
Credit Check A<br />
(Back)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
(Cancel)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 183 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 141: Create Shipping Point Determination<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
In this exercise you will create the table that will determine the shipping point to be used in your plant.<br />
While you have only created one shipping point, you still need to create the determination table. In<br />
determining the shipping point, the following are considered:<br />
• The Plant from the (1) Customer Ship-to Master or the (2) Material Master,<br />
• The Shipping Conditions from the customer master, and<br />
• The Loading Group from the material master.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Logistics Execution → Shipping → Basic Shipping Functions →<br />
Shipping Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination →<br />
Assign Shipping Points<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Select<br />
Shipping Point Information:<br />
SC (Shipping LGrp<br />
Plnt PrShP (Proposed Shipping point):<br />
condition):<br />
(Loading group): (Plant):<br />
01 (Standard) HAND (Load by Hand) P_ _ _ S_ _ _<br />
01 (Standard) CART (Handcart) P_ _ _ S_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 184 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 142: Create Revenue Account Assignment Key<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise creates the automatic posting of revenues when the billing document is created. At time<br />
of billing revenues are posted to the General Ledger Account. Which account to be posted is<br />
determined by a combination of:<br />
• The Sales Organization,<br />
• The Account assignment key, and<br />
• The Account Assignment Group (Customer Master)<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→<br />
Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Account Assignment/Costing →<br />
Revenue Account Determination → Assign G/L Accounts<br />
Trans Code<br />
Select Table 2: “Cust. Grp/Account Key”<br />
(Choose)<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Select<br />
Account assignment information:<br />
App CndTy ChAc SOrg AAG ActKy G/L Account<br />
V KOFI C_ _ _ S_ _ _ 01 ERL 600_ _ _<br />
V KOFI C_ _ _ S_ _ _ 01 ERS 610_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit back to the Easy Access Menu)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 185 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 143: Check Stock Status<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to obtain current inventory information about your products.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MMBE<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment →<br />
Stock → Stock Overview<br />
Database selections<br />
Material Choose any material<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Execute)<br />
Select the plant line in the display.<br />
Select<br />
This will open a pop-up window showing the details of the inventory by stock type at the level you<br />
selected.<br />
Record the unrestricted use quantity (Unrestricted use) stock type<br />
Record the sales orders quantity (Sales orders) stock type<br />
Record the delivery quantity (Scheduled for delivery) stock type<br />
Record the storage location and quantity of inventory for each Stock type:<br />
Plant<br />
Storage Location<br />
HELM_ _ _ ULOK_ _ _ SADL_ _ _ PUMP_ _ _<br />
Stock Type<br />
Unrestricted Use<br />
Sales Orders<br />
Scheduled for Delivery<br />
Quantity Quantity Quantity Quantity<br />
(Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 186 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Comprehensive Test of <strong>Business</strong> Case Scenario<br />
Unit 18:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 18 is to provide a comprehensive testing of the organizational and master data,<br />
you have set up using a series of transactions. These transactions will provide you with an<br />
understanding of how the options you selected during configuration impact your transactions.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 187 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 144: Create Sales Order<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you create a sales order. This if the first exercise that will test the configuration<br />
of your system as a trading goods company. The other exercises in this unit replicate the sales<br />
exercises completed in Unit 2.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VA01<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create<br />
Order type OR<br />
Organizational Data<br />
Sales Organization S_ _ _<br />
Distribution channel RE<br />
Division 01<br />
(Enter)<br />
Sold-to party Customer # for Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC<br />
PO Number 144-_ _ _<br />
PO date Today’s date<br />
Sales TAB<br />
Req. deliv. date 3 days from today<br />
Enter the following:<br />
Material QTY<br />
HELM_ _ _ 30<br />
ULOK _ _ _ 10<br />
SADL _ _ _ 50<br />
PUMP _ _ _ 10<br />
(Enter)<br />
Review<br />
Item Specific Data:<br />
Select line item 10<br />
(Conditions)<br />
Review item pricing<br />
What is the price per unit for HELM_ _ _? _____________________<br />
(Back)<br />
Select line item 20<br />
(Schedule lines for item)<br />
What is the date for the confirmed quantity? _______________________<br />
(Back)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 188 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Select line item 30<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
(Display availability)<br />
What is a simulated Requirement? _____________________________________<br />
(Back)<br />
Header Data:<br />
System Menu: Goto → Header → Sales<br />
Sales TAB<br />
Note and record the pricing procedure ______________________<br />
Conditions TAB<br />
Note and record the net value for the order – this is the total of all line items $____________________<br />
(Back)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 189 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 145: Check Stock Status<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to update the current inventory information about your products.<br />
Open a new session (or System Menu: System → Create session)<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MMBE<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment →<br />
Stock → Stock Overview<br />
Database selections<br />
Material Any material from your sales order<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Execute)<br />
Select the plant line in the display.<br />
Select<br />
This will open a pop-up window showing the details of the inventory by stock type at the level you<br />
selected.<br />
Record the unrestricted use quantity (Unrestricted use) stock type<br />
Record the sales orders quantity (Sales orders) stock type<br />
Record the delivery quantity (Scheduled for delivery) stock type<br />
Record the storage location and quantity of inventory for each Stock type:<br />
Plant<br />
Storage Location<br />
HELM_ _ _ ULOK_ _ _ SADL_ _ _ PUMP_ _ _<br />
Stock Type<br />
Unrestricted Use<br />
Sales Orders<br />
Scheduled for Delivery<br />
Quantity Quantity Quantity Quantity<br />
(Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 190 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 146: Create Delivery Note for Sales Order<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create a delivery based on the customer’s order. Creating the<br />
delivery brings your order to the point where stock availability is re-determined, and the quantity of<br />
ordered items are moved to a scheduled for delivery stock status.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VL01N<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →<br />
Outbound Delivery → Create → Single Document →<br />
With Reference to Sales Order<br />
Shipping point: S_ _ _<br />
Sales order data<br />
Selection date: Enter a date 7 days from today<br />
Order: Enter the order number of the sales order created earlier<br />
(Enter)<br />
The system defaults the items and quantities from the sales order that are scheduled to be delivered.<br />
Item Overview Tab<br />
Click on the line item 10<br />
(Item Details)<br />
What is the picking status? _______________________________<br />
(Back)<br />
Picking Tab:<br />
Enter the Storage location for each item<br />
Sloc: 10 (Inventory)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the Outbound Delivery number: _________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 191 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 147: Check Stock Status<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to update the current inventory information about your products.<br />
Open a new session (or System Menu: System → Create session)<br />
Now go to your other session (Alt + Tab), and leave this session open.<br />
Click on the REFRESH icon or if the Stock Overview is no longer displayed enter the menu<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
path and information below.<br />
Trans Code MMBE<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment →<br />
Stock → Stock Overview<br />
Database selections<br />
Material Any material from your sales order<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Execute)<br />
Select the plant line in the display.<br />
Select<br />
This will open a pop-up window showing the details of the inventory by stock type at the level you<br />
selected.<br />
Record the unrestricted use quantity (Unrestricted use) stock type<br />
Record the sales orders quantity (Sales orders) stock type<br />
Record the delivery quantity (Scheduled for delivery) stock type<br />
Record the storage location and quantity of inventory for each Stock type:<br />
Plant<br />
Storage Location<br />
HELM_ _ _ ULOK_ _ _ SADL_ _ _ PUMP_ _ _<br />
Stock Type<br />
Unrestricted Use<br />
Sales Orders<br />
Scheduled for Delivery<br />
Quantity Quantity Quantity Quantity<br />
(Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 192 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 148: Picking Materials on Delivery Note<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to pick the materials. The delivery note indicates the quantity of the<br />
proposed materials per delivery.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VL02N<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →<br />
Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document<br />
Outbound Delivery Outbound delivery number from the previous exercise.<br />
(Enter)<br />
The material delivery quantity is proposed.<br />
Picking Tab<br />
Enter Pick quantity to match the proposed delivery quantity<br />
Picked Qty = Deliv. Qty<br />
(Save)<br />
Recheck the stock status of the materials. Note that no change has occurred in the stock status - the<br />
quantities are still in the “Schd. for delivery” stock type field.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 193 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 149: Post Goods Issue<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you post goods issue. Post goods issue reduces unrestricted stock to reflect<br />
the inventory shipped. This is the time at which the ownership of the goods changes from you to the<br />
customer. These goods have left your plant and are now owned by your customer. Both inventory and<br />
costs of goods sold are impacted by this transaction.<br />
If you have shipped or sold the goods FOB Destination, the actual change of ownership takes place at<br />
the time the goods are received at the customer’s location. However, the system reflects the materials<br />
are no longer available in your stock at the time of post good issue.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VL02N<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →<br />
Outbound Delivery → Change→ Single Document<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Outbound Delivery Outbound delivery number from the previous exercise.<br />
Select<br />
The system returns a message indicating change to the delivery note.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 194 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 150: Check Stock Status<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to update the current inventory information about your products.<br />
Now go to your other session (Alt + Tab), and leave this session open.<br />
Click on the REFRESH icon or if the Stock Overview is no longer displayed enter the menu<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
path and information below.<br />
Trans Code MMBE<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment →<br />
Stock → Stock Overview<br />
Database selections<br />
Material Any material from your sales order<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Execute)<br />
Select the plant line in the display.<br />
Select<br />
This will open a pop-up window showing the details of the inventory by stock type at the level you<br />
selected.<br />
Record the unrestricted use quantity (Unrestricted use) stock type<br />
Record the sales orders quantity (Sales orders) stock type<br />
Record the delivery quantity (Scheduled for delivery) stock type<br />
Record the storage location and quantity of inventory for each Stock type:<br />
Plant<br />
Storage Location<br />
HELM_ _ _ ULOK_ _ _ SADL_ _ _ PUMP_ _ _<br />
Stock Type<br />
Unrestricted Use<br />
Sales Orders<br />
Scheduled for Delivery<br />
Quantity Quantity Quantity Quantity<br />
(Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 195 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 151: Bill Customer<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will create the billing document for the customer. It is at this time when the revenue is<br />
recognized and posted to the general ledger. Once the post goods issue has been completed, you can<br />
bill your customer for those goods.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VF01<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing Document → Create<br />
The system will default the last delivery document created.<br />
(Execute)<br />
The system displays the customer and the materials on the delivery with total values to be billed.<br />
Record the total amount billed to the customer: $____________________<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the billing document number that is displayed at the bottom of the screen ________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 196 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 152: Post Receipt of Customer Payment<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will see your customer paying the invoice you created in the billing exercise. The<br />
payment will be posted to the general ledger accounts. This entry will increase the bank account and<br />
reduce the customers account receivable balance as well as the account receivable reconciliation<br />
account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code F-28<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable →<br />
Document Entry → Incoming Payment<br />
Document Date: Today’s date<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
Currency/Rate: USD<br />
Bank data:<br />
Account: 100_ _ _<br />
Amount: Enter the amount of the payment (from sales order)<br />
Open item selection<br />
Account: Customer # for Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC<br />
Select<br />
Double click on “USD gross” amount for the Customer Invoice until “Not assigned” is $ 0.00<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the document number for this posting ________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
(Exit)<br />
<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 197 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 153: Review Document Flow<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise provides you with exposure to a powerful tool in customer order management. The<br />
document flow provides a look at the entire transaction from beginning to the end. In this example, you<br />
have created an order, a delivery, posted goods issue, billed the customer and received payment. To<br />
examine the flow, you can begin with any one of these document numbers and the document flow will<br />
show an audit trail of all documents tied to that number.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter your sales order number.<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Display<br />
System Menu: Environment → Display Document flow<br />
The system displays a list of documents associated with the order.<br />
Click on the line of the GD goods issue: delvy 49000….###<br />
Select<br />
The system displays the material document with a goods movement “601”, which is the movement type<br />
for goods issue to a delivery note (Post Goods Issue).<br />
Select to view the account postings for this goods movement.<br />
(Back) To the Document Flow Screen<br />
It can be seen that the:<br />
1. The entire document flow is shown.<br />
2. There are no open documents.<br />
3. The business cycle is complete.<br />
Note: You can view the document flow from the Sales Order, Delivery or Billing screens.<br />
Click on the line of the Standard Order #<br />
Select the<br />
The document flow can be seen in greater detail.<br />
Click on the line of the Outbound Delivery #<br />
Select the<br />
The Document Header Status can be viewed<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 198 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Unit 19:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 19 is to create a sales order using your customer info record for Pleasure Bikes<br />
Buying Group and then complete the order to cash business process.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 199 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 154: Create Customer Material Info Record<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise introduces you to the concept of Customer Material Information Records. When a<br />
customer wishes to order materials from us using a different naming convention than you do, you can<br />
set up a Customer Material Info Record which allows us to enter materials by the customer's specific<br />
naming convention. This is especially true in the wholesale area. Customers order products by their<br />
product number not necessarily your product number. SAP provides for the translation of these<br />
materials into your material names, which enables the customer and your sales representative to<br />
communicate clearly.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VD51<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Agreements →<br />
Customer Material Information → Create<br />
Customer Customer # for Pleasure Bikes Buying Group<br />
Sales Organization S_ _ _<br />
Distribution Channel WH<br />
(Enter)<br />
Enter the following materials and the corresponding customer material name as indicated:<br />
Material – Customer Specific Information:<br />
Material No Pleasure Bikes Buying Group Material Number<br />
HELM_ _ _ Head-Bucket<br />
ULOK_ _ _ PB-Lock<br />
SADL_ _ _ PB-Seat<br />
PUMP_ _ _ Air-Machine<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 200 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 155: Create Sales Order Using Customer Info Record<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you create a sales order using Pleasure Bikes Buying Group customer/material<br />
info record (their part numbers/name).<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VA01<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create<br />
Order type OR<br />
Organizational Data<br />
Sales Organization S_ _ _<br />
Distribution channel WH<br />
Division 01<br />
(Enter)<br />
Sold-to party Customer # for Pleasure Bikes Buying Group<br />
PO Number 155-_ _ _<br />
PO date Today’s date<br />
(Enter)<br />
Ordering party tab<br />
A new field appears in the Sales Order line item: “Customer Material Numb.”<br />
Enter the following customer materials and quantities:<br />
Customer Material Numb Order Quantity Material (Leave blank)<br />
Head-Bucket 20<br />
PB-Lock 15<br />
PB-Seat 30<br />
Air-Machine 20<br />
(Enter)<br />
Note: The system references the customer material numbers and copies our equivalent material number<br />
and all relevant data.<br />
Check the pricing to see that wholesale pricing was applied.<br />
Go to the header and record the Sales Orders Net Value $________________________<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the order number: _______________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 201 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 156: Create Delivery for Sales Order<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create a delivery based on the customer’s order. Creating the<br />
delivery brings your order to the point where stock availability is re-determined, and the quantity of<br />
ordered items are moved to a scheduled for delivery stock status.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VL01N<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →<br />
Outbound Delivery → Create → Single Document →<br />
With Reference to Sales Order<br />
Shipping point: S_ _ _<br />
Sales order data<br />
Selection date: Enter a date 7 days from today<br />
Order: Enter the order number of the sales order created earlier<br />
(Enter)<br />
The system defaults the items and quantities from the sales order that are scheduled to be delivered.<br />
Item Overview Tab<br />
Click on the line item 10<br />
(Item Details)<br />
What is the picking status? _______________________________<br />
(Back)<br />
Picking Tab:<br />
Enter the Storage location for each item<br />
Sloc: 10 (Inventory)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the Outbound Delivery number: _________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 202 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 157: Pick Materials on Delivery Note<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to pick the materials. The delivery note indicates the quantity of the<br />
proposed materials per delivery.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VL02N<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →<br />
Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document<br />
Outbound Delivery Outbound delivery number from the previous exercise.<br />
(Enter)<br />
The material delivery quantity is proposed.<br />
Picking Tab<br />
Enter Pick quantity to match the proposed delivery quantity<br />
Picked Qty = Deliv. Qty<br />
(Save)<br />
To recheck the stock status (see earlier exercises):<br />
Create new session.<br />
Check the stock status of the materials<br />
Check the stock status of the materials. Note that the stock status - the quantities are in the “Schd.<br />
for delivery” stock type field.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 203 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 158: Post Goods Issue<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you post goods issue. Post goods issue reduces unrestricted stock to reflect<br />
the inventory shipped. This is the time at which the ownership of the goods changes from you to the<br />
customer. These goods have left your plant and are now owned by your customer. Both inventory and<br />
costs of goods sold are impacted by this transaction.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path:<br />
Trans Code: VL02N<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →<br />
Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Outbound Delivery Outbound delivery number from the previous exercise.<br />
Select<br />
The system returns a message indicating change to the delivery note.<br />
To recheck the stock status (see earlier exercises):<br />
Switch back to your other session that is still on the Stock overview.<br />
Check the stock status of the materials<br />
Note the quantity from the “Schd. for delivery” stock type has disappeared and the “Unrestricted use”<br />
stock quantity has been reduced.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 204 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 159: Bill customer<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will create the billing document for the customer. It is at this time when the revenue is<br />
recognized and posted to the general ledger. Once the post goods issue has been completed, you can<br />
bill your customer for those goods.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VF01<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing Document → Create<br />
The system will default the last delivery document created.<br />
(Execute)<br />
The system displays the customer and the materials on the delivery with total values to be billed.<br />
Record the total amount billed to the customer: $____________________<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the billing document number that is displayed at the bottom of the screen ________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 205 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 160: Post Receipt of Customer Payment<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will see your customer paying the invoice you created in the billing exercise. The<br />
payment will be posted to the general ledger accounts. This entry will increase the bank account and<br />
reduce the customer’s account receivable balance as well as the account receivable reconciliation<br />
account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path:<br />
Trans Code: F-28<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable →<br />
Document Entry → Incoming Payments<br />
Document Date: Today’s date<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
Currency/Rate: USD<br />
Bank data:<br />
Account: 100_ _ _<br />
Amount: Enter the amount of the payment (from sales order)<br />
Open item selection<br />
Account: Customer # for Pleasure Bikes Buying Group<br />
Select<br />
Review the “Not assigned” amount. Is it equal to zero?<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the document number for this posting ________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Return to the Sales Order and review the Document flow for the customer orders that you just<br />
processed.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 206 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Unit 20:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 20 is to create a sales order using a scheduling agreement for Sierra Nevada<br />
Peddlers and deliver against the scheduling agreement.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 207 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 161: Create a Scheduling Agreement<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you create a scheduling agreement for Sierra Nevada Peddlers .<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VA31<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Scheduling Agreement → Create<br />
Sched. Agreemt Type LP<br />
Organizational Data<br />
Sales Organization S_ _ _<br />
Distribution Channel RE<br />
Division 01<br />
(Enter)<br />
Scheduling Agreeme (leave blank)<br />
Sold-to party Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC<br />
Ship-to part leave blank<br />
PO number 161-_ _ _<br />
PO date Today’s date<br />
Item overview TAB:<br />
Description: Scheduling Agreement _ _ _<br />
Valid-from date: Today’s date<br />
Valid-to date: Six months from today’s date<br />
All items<br />
Material: ULOK_ _ _<br />
Target quantity: 25<br />
(Enter)<br />
Select the item line for ULOK_ _ _<br />
Select Schedule lines for items button from the button bar on the bottom<br />
Enter three schedule lines<br />
First line 6 days from today for 5 locks<br />
Second line 14 days from today for 10 locks<br />
Third line: 2 months from today for 10 locks<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the Scheduling Agreement Number: ___________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 208 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 162: <strong>Process</strong> Deliveries for a Scheduling Agreement<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you create a delivery with reference to the scheduling agreement.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VL01N<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →<br />
Outbound Delivery → Create → Single Document →<br />
With Reference to Sales Order<br />
Shipping point: S_ _ _<br />
Sales order data<br />
Selection date: Enter a date 7 days from today<br />
Order: Enter the order number of the Scheduling Agreement created earlier<br />
(Enter)<br />
Performing the steps for Picking and Posting Goods Issue.<br />
Record Outbound Delivery Number: _________________________<br />
Repeat the exercise using a selection date 14 day’s from today’s date<br />
Record Outbound Delivery Number: _________________________<br />
Note that by selecting dates after the due date of each schedule line, only the material scheduled<br />
as due by that date is selected<br />
Record any system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 209 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 163: Display Scheduling Agreement<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise has you display the scheduling agreement you created earlier to review the current<br />
status.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VA33<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Scheduling Agreement → Display<br />
Scheduling Agreement Scheduling Agreement # you created<br />
(Enter)<br />
Select the line item<br />
Select (Schedule lines for item)<br />
Note the “Delivered qty” field now has the quantity of the material delivered filled in for those deliveries<br />
that have been made.<br />
Select (Display document flow)<br />
Review the document flow you will see one schedule agreement followed by first outbound delivery, the<br />
picking request and the post goods issue then the second outbound delivery, the picking request and the<br />
post goods issue.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 210 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 164: Check Stock Status<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to update the current inventory information about your products.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MMBE<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment →<br />
Stock → Stock Overview<br />
Database selections<br />
Material ULOK _ _ _ (check for all materials and record below)<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Execute)<br />
Select the plant line in the display.<br />
Select<br />
This will open a pop-up window showing the details of the inventory by stock type at the level you<br />
selected.<br />
Check the unrestricted use quantity (Unrestricted use) stock type<br />
Check the sales orders quantity (Sales orders) stock type<br />
Check the customer scheduling agreements quantity (Customer Scheduling Agreements) stock type<br />
Check the delivery quantity (Scheduled for delivery) stock type<br />
Record the storage location and quantity of inventory for each Stock type:<br />
Plant<br />
Storage Location<br />
HELM_ _ _ ULOK_ _ _ SADL_ _ _ PUMP_ _ _<br />
Stock Type<br />
Unrestricted Use<br />
Sales Orders<br />
Customer Scheduling Agreements<br />
Scheduled for Delivery<br />
Quantity Quantity Quantity Quantity<br />
(Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 211 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 165: Bill customer<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will create the billing document for the customer. It is at this time when the revenue is<br />
recognized and posted to the general ledger. Once the post goods issue has been completed, you can<br />
bill your customer for those goods.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VF01<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing Document → Create<br />
Create a billing document for each of the two outbound delivery documents created in exercise 162.<br />
Record the billing document number for the 1st delivery: __________________________<br />
Record the billing document number for the 2nd delivery: __________________________<br />
What is the total for both invoices? ___________________________<br />
Record any system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 212 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 166: Run Customer Credit Check<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to review the customer credit profile.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code F.31<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Credit Management →<br />
Credit management info system → Overview<br />
Credit account Customer # for Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC<br />
Credit control area C_ _ _<br />
(Execute)<br />
Place cursor on customer number<br />
System Menu: Environment → Credit Master Sheet<br />
Review information<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 213 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 167: Post Receipt of Customer Payment<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will see your customer paying the invoice you created in the billing exercise. The<br />
payment will be posted to the general ledger accounts. This entry will increase the bank account and<br />
reduce the customers account receivable balance as well as the account receivable reconciliation<br />
account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path:<br />
Trans Code: F-28<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable →<br />
Document Entry → Incoming Payments<br />
Document Date: Today’s date<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
Currency/Rate: USD<br />
Bank data:<br />
Account: 100_ _ _<br />
Amount: Enter the amount of the payment (total from both invoices)<br />
Open item selection<br />
Account: Customer # for Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC<br />
Select<br />
Review the “Not assigned” amount. Is it equal to zero?<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the document number for this posting ________________<br />
Note that we can clear more than one invoice with a single incoming payment.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Return to the Scheduling Agreement and review the Document flow for the agreement.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 214 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Unit 21:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 21 is to create two sales orders. One sales order using the item proposal and the<br />
second sales order that will result in a credit warning, as well as request more goods than you have for<br />
sale. This will require you to run Material Requirements Planning, convert purchase requisitions to<br />
purchase orders, receive the goods, receive the invoices, and post payment to the vendors. The<br />
deliveries for these sales orders will be completed in the next unit.<br />
Before proceeding, check stock levels for all materials. Your Unrestricted stock level should<br />
match your safety stock level on all materials.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 215 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 168: Create Item Proposal<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to allow for situations where a customer often places an order with the<br />
same line items, an Item Proposal (order template) can be created with the standard line items and<br />
quantities already filled in. You can then pull the standard items in as you create the sales order by<br />
referencing the Item Proposal. Once referenced and pulled into the order quantities can be changed,<br />
line items can be deleted or added.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VA51<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Products →<br />
Item Proposal → Create<br />
Item Proposal Type PV<br />
Organizational Data<br />
Sales Organization S_ _ _<br />
Distribution Channel RE<br />
Division 01<br />
(Enter)<br />
Item proposal leave blank<br />
Description SAP Promotion Set<br />
Valid-from date Today’s date<br />
Valid-to date One year from today<br />
Enter the following materials and quantities:<br />
HELM_ _ _ 20<br />
ULOK_ _ _ 10<br />
SADL_ _ _ 10<br />
PUMP_ _ _ 30<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the Item Proposal Number: _____________________<br />
Record any system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 216 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 169: Assign Item Proposal to Customer<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
In this exercise you will now assign that item proposal to the customer master. Whenever you ask for<br />
an Item Proposal in a sales order for that customer, the system will default this Item Proposal.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code XD02<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → <strong>Business</strong> Partner →<br />
Customer → Change → Complete<br />
Customer SAP America<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Sales area<br />
Sales Organization S_ _ _<br />
Distribution Channel RE<br />
Division 01<br />
(Enter)<br />
Select<br />
Sales TAB<br />
Item proposal # of the newly created item proposal.<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 217 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 170: Create Sales Order Using Item Proposal<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you create a sales order using the item proposal we created and assigned to<br />
SAP, America. We will use the materials and quantities in the item proposal.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VA01<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create<br />
Order type OR<br />
Organizational Data<br />
Sales Organization S_ _ _<br />
Distribution channel RE<br />
Division 01<br />
(Enter)<br />
Sold-to party Customer # for SAP, America<br />
Ship-to party Leave Blank<br />
PO Number 170-_ _ _<br />
PO date Today’s date<br />
(Enter)<br />
A pop-up window appears with the two “ship-to” addresses for this customer.<br />
Select SAP, America – UAP<br />
(Enter)<br />
Select: to search for your item proposal<br />
In the pop-up window, the system copies the number of the product proposal for this customer<br />
Select<br />
You may also need to select the delivery you wish:<br />
• One-time del. On req. del. dte.<br />
• Complete delivery<br />
• Dely proposal<br />
Select (Copy) for a Complete delivery – Note: This may haSADL for multiple items.<br />
Review the pricing options:<br />
Select the line item ULOK_ _ _<br />
Click and note the pricing ___________________________<br />
(Back)<br />
Select the line item SADL_ _ _<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 218 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Click and note the pricing ____________________________<br />
(Back)<br />
Select the line item HELM_ _ _<br />
Click and note the pricing ___________________________<br />
(Back)<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Does the material pricing include the special customer pricing that was established for SAP, United<br />
States? ________________________________________________________________________<br />
Record the Sales Order Net Value: _________________________<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the Sales Order Number: _____________________________<br />
Record any system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 219 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 171: Create Sales Order – Value Discount<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you create a sales order that will demonstrate the discounts prices we<br />
established for River City Racers<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create<br />
Order type OR<br />
Organizational Data<br />
Sales Organization S_ _ _<br />
Distribution channel WH<br />
Division 01<br />
(Enter)<br />
Sold-to party Customer # for River City Racers, Inc<br />
PO Number 171-_ _ _<br />
PO date Today’s date<br />
(Enter)<br />
Sales TAB<br />
Req. deliv. date 3 days from today<br />
Enter the following:<br />
Material QTY<br />
HELM_ _ 100<br />
ULOK _ _ _ 40<br />
SADL _ _ _ 30<br />
PUMP _ _ _ 50<br />
(Enter)<br />
You will need to select the delivery you wish:<br />
• One-time del. On req. del. dte.<br />
• Complete delivery<br />
• Dely proposal<br />
Select (Copy) for a Complete delivery<br />
You will receive one or more warnings that credit limit is exceeded – Note: This is only an information<br />
message or warning; as such you will be able to continue processing the order.<br />
Select the line item ULOK_ _ _<br />
Click and note the pricing and discount<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 220 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
(Back)<br />
Select the line item SADL_ _ _<br />
Click and note the pricing and discount<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Review<br />
The material pricing includes the 5% discount from the customer-specific material pricing record for<br />
>$500 and $1,000 and $1,500.<br />
Change the quantity of the line item for SADL_ _ _ from 30 to 60 and verify that the discount<br />
changed.<br />
Select the line item SADL_ _ _<br />
Click and note the pricing and discount<br />
(Back)<br />
Record the Sales Order Net Value: ______________________________<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the Sales Order Number: ______________________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 221 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 172: Run Material Requirements Planning – Single Item,<br />
Single Level<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to have the system plan all MRP relevant materials.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MD01<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management →Material Requirements Planning (MRP) →<br />
MRP → Planning → Total Planning → Online<br />
Scope of planning Leave Blank<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
MRP control parameters<br />
<strong>Process</strong>ing key NETCH<br />
Create purchase req 2<br />
Schedule lines 3<br />
Create MRP list 1<br />
Planning mode 1<br />
Scheduling 1<br />
<strong>Process</strong> Control Parameters<br />
Select Display material list<br />
(Enter)<br />
A warning message appears - please check input parameters<br />
(Enter) again to confirm and check the warning message<br />
An information message appears indicating you will need to press enter to start the planning run.<br />
(Continue)<br />
To review the MRP list select<br />
Place cursor into itme that you wish to review<br />
Material SADL_ _ _<br />
Press (Enter)<br />
Review the MRP list for SADL_ _ _<br />
Note that there may be multiple requisitions for each material due to different requirement dates.<br />
Review MRP list for HELM_ _ _ ; ULOK_ _ _ ; SADL_ _ _; and PUMP_ _ _<br />
Total for all Requisitions<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
HELM_ _ _ ULOK_ _ _ SADL_ _ _ PUMP_ _ _<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 222 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 173: Create Purchasing Information Record for SADL<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create purchasing information records for SADL_ _ _. A purchasing<br />
information record creates a link between a material and a vendor.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code ME11<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management →Purchasing → Master Data →<br />
Info Record → Create<br />
Vendor Vendor # for SLICK BIKES<br />
Material SADL_ _ _<br />
Purchasing Org. P_ _ _<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
<br />
Enter the following information on the Create Info Record: Purch. Organization Data 1 screen<br />
Standard Qty.: 1<br />
Net Price: 23.25<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 223 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 174: Assign Source of Supply to Purchase Requisitions<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to assign a source of supply for your purchase requisitions.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MD04<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Materials Requirements Planning (MRP) →<br />
MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Requirements List<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Individual access Tab<br />
Material: SADL_ _ _<br />
Plant: P_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Select a requisition (if more than one – select the one with the largest quantity)<br />
(Detail of element)<br />
(Change element)<br />
Item Overview section<br />
Enter the Storage Location 10<br />
Item section<br />
Source of Supply Tab<br />
<br />
This provides a list of possible sources of supply. Select SLICK BIKES _ _ _ by clicking in the Assign<br />
Source of Supply box next to the vendor number. There should be a green dot next to the vendor<br />
number after you have assigned the source of supply.<br />
(Save)<br />
Assign SLICK BIKES as the Source of Supply for the largest requisitions for HELM_ _ _ ; ULOK_ _ _<br />
; and PUMP_ _ _ in the same manner as you have just completed for SADL_ _ _.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 224 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 175: Create Purchase Order via Requisition Assignment List<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create a purchase order using a requisition assignment list. Since<br />
you have assigned a source of supply to your requisition in the previous exercise, you can now convert<br />
these purchase requisitions into a single purchase order as they are all assigned to the same vendor.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code ME58<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order →<br />
Create → Via Requisition Assignment List<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Vendor Vendor # for SLICK BIKES<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Execute)<br />
Select the line showing the number of purchase orders (there should be 4)<br />
Click on the button<br />
Verify the following:<br />
Order Type NB<br />
Purchase Order Date Today’s Date<br />
Purchase Order Leave Blank<br />
Purchasing Group _ _ _<br />
Purchasing Organization P_ _ _<br />
(Continue)<br />
Single-Click on Open Requisitions line in the left window (see below)<br />
Then Select (Adopt)<br />
Enter through warning if delivery date can’t be met and the existence of a contract.<br />
Verify the details of the purchase order<br />
Increase the PO Quantity for each item by 50 over the total of all requisitions recorded when you ran<br />
MRP online.<br />
Record the amounts for the individual lines items as well as the total order in the table below<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 225 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Item Number Ordered Dollar Amount<br />
SADL _ _ _<br />
ULOK _ _ _<br />
HELM _ _ _<br />
PUMP _ _ _<br />
Total for PO<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the new purchase order number._____________________<br />
(Exit )<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 226 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 176: Create Goods Receipt<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise has you receive the pens that have arrived at your receiving dock and are ready to be<br />
received into inventory.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MIGO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →<br />
Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order →<br />
GR for Purchase Order (MIGO)<br />
Purchase Order 4500000???<br />
(Execute)<br />
Ensure each line item OK is checked<br />
Verify storage location was entered 10 (Inventory)<br />
Notice that the quantity from the PO defaults as the quantity to receive.<br />
Select or (Save)<br />
Record the Material Document Number: _______________________<br />
View the material document by changing the transaction from Goods Receipt to Display. This will<br />
bring up your material document.<br />
(Execute)<br />
You should see your material document – record the movement type: _____________<br />
Doc. info Tab<br />
Select to view the financial document<br />
Record the Financial Accounting Document Number: _______________________<br />
Record the name of the two G/L accounts posted to in this transaction:<br />
_________________________________ _________________________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 227 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 177: Create Invoice Receipt from Vendor<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise has you enter the Vendors invoiced for the items ordered.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code MIRO<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Logistics Invoice Verification →<br />
Document Entry → Enter Invoice<br />
Basic data Tab<br />
Invoice date Today's date<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Currency (behind amount) USD<br />
Purchase Order (Your Purchase Order #)<br />
(Enter)<br />
Amount Enter the amount that you recorded in Exercise 175<br />
Tax code XI (This should come in automatically – if not, enter it)<br />
Jurisdiction Code CA0000000<br />
(Enter)<br />
Use the button to see if the postings are correct.<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the Document Number: _________________________<br />
Record any system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 228 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 178: Post Payment to Vendor<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to post payment to the vendor. The invoice is now due for payment.<br />
You are requested to clear the invoice by posting an outgoing payment using the bank account (no.<br />
1000_ _) of your chart of accounts.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code F-53<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Document Entry →<br />
Outgoing Payment→ Post<br />
Document Date Today’s date<br />
Bank data<br />
Account 100_ _ _ (Bank - Checking)<br />
Amount Enter the amount of the outgoing payment<br />
Text Invoice Number or other text<br />
Open items selection<br />
Account Vendor # for SLICK BIKES<br />
Select<br />
Review the “Not assigned” balance, ensure that it equals zero.<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the Accounting Document Number: __________________________<br />
Record any system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 229 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Unit 22:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 22 is to look at the functionality of delivery and billing due lists. Delivery and billing<br />
due list provide you the opportunity to create your deliveries and billings collectively, rather than one at<br />
a time.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 230 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 179: Run Delivery Due List<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to have you run a delivery due list. In normal daily operation, creating<br />
delivery notes for each individual sales order is the exception rather than the rule. In most companies,<br />
the shipping department would run the delivery due list, which, creates delivery notes for any material<br />
with deliverable items.<br />
Items which are due for delivery are defined by the following parameters:<br />
• Material is available and scheduled<br />
• The date of due delivery has arrived<br />
• Material is delivered for the chosen shipping point (determined from shipping point<br />
determination)<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VL10A<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →<br />
Outbound Delivery → Create →<br />
Collective <strong>Process</strong>ing of Documents Due for Delivery → Sales Orders<br />
Shipping Point/Receiving Pt S_ _ _<br />
Deliv. Creation Date Enter dates from one week ago to 14 days from today<br />
General data TAB:<br />
Sales Organization S_ _ _<br />
(Execute)<br />
Select the desired line(s)<br />
Select In some cases, the system has combined deliveries from different orders on the<br />
same delivery note number. This is set in the customer master, by selecting Order combination.<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the delivery note document numbers: _____________________ ______________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 231 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 180: Pick Materials on Delivery Note<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
In this exercise you will update the delivery documents created by entering the picked quantities into<br />
the delivery note. When saved, the delivery has changed to a picked status.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VL02N<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →<br />
Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document<br />
Enter a delivery note number from the previous exercise.<br />
(Enter)<br />
Picking TAB:<br />
Select the storage location for the individual materials.<br />
Enter the Picked quantity (it should be the same as the Delivery quantity for each material).<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Repeat for all outbound deliveries created in the previous exercise.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 232 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 181: Post Goods Issue<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you create the post goods issue which reduces unrestricted stock to reflect the<br />
inventory has shipped. This needs to be completed for all delivery notes.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →<br />
Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document<br />
Outbound Delivery Outbound delivery number from the previous exercise.<br />
Select<br />
The system returns a message indicating change to the delivery note.<br />
Repeat for all outbound deliveries you processed in the previous exercise.<br />
Record any system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 233 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 182: Run Billing Due List, Invoice Customers<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise introduces you to the concept of collective billing. The Billing due list is a collective<br />
display of all bills due in a specified period of time. This allows you to then individually or collectively<br />
create all the invoices.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code VF04<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing Document →<br />
<strong>Process</strong> Billing Due List<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Billing Data<br />
Billing Date from a week ago<br />
Billing to date today’s date is defaulted as the “to” date<br />
Billing Type leave blank<br />
SD Document leave blank<br />
Selection Tab<br />
Organizat. Data<br />
Sales organization S_ _ _<br />
Documents to be selected<br />
Select Order-related<br />
Select Delivery-related<br />
Click<br />
<br />
The system lists all the documents (Delivery numbers) due for invoicing<br />
Now we complete the invoices as follows:<br />
Highlight an individual SD document number<br />
Click on<br />
(Save)<br />
Record Billing Document Number: ________________________<br />
(Back)<br />
The next delivery note should be on the Create Billing Document Screen<br />
(Execute)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record Billing Document Number: ________________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 234 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 183: Post Receipt of Customer Payment<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you go through and post receipt of payment from all of our customers for all the<br />
orders you have created to date. You post the incoming payment to the customer's account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code F-28<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable →<br />
Document Entry → Incoming Payments<br />
Document Date Today’s date<br />
Company Code C _ _ _<br />
Currency/Rate USD<br />
Bank data<br />
Account Your Bank Account<br />
Amount Enter the amount of the payment<br />
Open item selection<br />
Account Customer Number<br />
Select<br />
Note: The “not assigned” amount should be 0.00<br />
(Save)<br />
This process will need to be repeated for both customers for which you created invoices.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 235 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Unit 23:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Unit<br />
The purpose of Unit 23 is to introduce you to the return process. In this unit you will create a goods<br />
return order, receive the goods, and complete the process by transferring them back into unrestricted<br />
stock, issuing a credit and pay the customer for the goods they returned.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 236 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 184: Create Goods Return Order<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
In this exercise you will create a return for fifty (50) helmets due to a quantity discrepancy. The<br />
process of creating a goods return order is no different from that of creating a standard sales order.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Change<br />
Order Order # from River City Racers<br />
(Enter)<br />
Acknowledge Information pop-up window: “Consider the subsequent documents”<br />
System Menu: Sales Document → Create subsequent order<br />
Order type RE<br />
Organizational Data<br />
Sales Organization S_ _ _<br />
Distribution Channel WH<br />
Division 01<br />
Select<br />
Select<br />
(Deselect All)<br />
Select Material HELM_ _ _<br />
Change Open Quantity 50<br />
Select This will return you to the Create Returns Overview Screen<br />
Sales Tab<br />
Order reason Quantity Discrepancy<br />
Verify<br />
Material HELM_ _ _<br />
Quantity 50<br />
Record the Return Order Net Value $________________________<br />
(Save)<br />
Record Return Order Number __________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 237 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 185: Create Delivery Note for Return Order<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you create the goods receipt for the returned pens. The menu path for a goods<br />
receipt of a return order is no different from that of a delivery creation for sales order. A goods receipt<br />
is issued for blocked (inspection) stock.<br />
River City Racers– Return Merchandise Authorization<br />
RMA–1234<br />
Reason for rejection: Quantity Discrepancy<br />
ITEMS: HELM_ _ _ QUANTITY: 50<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Subsequent Functions →<br />
Outbound Delivery<br />
Shipping point S_ _ _<br />
Sales order data<br />
Selection date Today + 2 days<br />
Order Returns order number from previous exercise<br />
(Enter)<br />
Check the material, customer etc.<br />
If correct (Save)<br />
Record the Returns Delivery number: __________________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 238 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 186: Receive Materials from Goods Return Order<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to pick the goods and post goods issue.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →<br />
Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document<br />
Outbound Delivery Enter the delivery note number from your Return Order<br />
(Enter)<br />
Picking Tab<br />
Enter the storage location: 10 (Inventory)<br />
Select<br />
System should respond with message indicating that the Returns Delivery has been saved.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 239 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 187: Check Document Flow<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you review the document flow up to this point in the return process.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Change<br />
Document Return Order Number<br />
System Menu: Environment → Display document flow<br />
Display the GD document<br />
A material document is displayed showing a single goods movement. We see that movement type 651 is<br />
displayed. Since we haven’t accepted ownership yet, there are no accounting documents. Movement<br />
type 651 moves material into a “Returns” stock type.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 240 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 188: Review the Stock Overview<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you look at the stock overview and record the types of HELM_ _ _ stock.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment →<br />
Stock → Stock Overview<br />
Database selections<br />
Material HELM_ _ _<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Storage location Leave Blank<br />
(Execute)<br />
Select the plant line in the display.<br />
Select<br />
This will open a pop-up window showing the details of the inventory by stock type at the level you<br />
selected.<br />
Check the unrestricted use quantity (Unrestricted use) stock type<br />
Check the returns quantity (Returns) stock type<br />
Check the sales orders quantity (Sales orders) stock type<br />
Check the delivery quantity (Scheduled for delivery) stock type<br />
Record the storage location and quantity of inventory for each Stock type:<br />
Plant<br />
HELM_ _ _<br />
Storage Location<br />
Stock Type<br />
Quantity<br />
Unrestricted Use<br />
Returns<br />
Sales Orders<br />
Scheduled for Delivery<br />
(Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 241 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 189: Transfer Return Stock to Unrestricted Use<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to transfer the returned goods to unrestricted stock. The movement<br />
results in a debit to the trading goods account and a credit to the COGS account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →<br />
Goods Movement → Transfer Posting<br />
System Menu: Movement Type → Transfer Posting → Stock to Stock → Own from Returns<br />
Enter the following:<br />
Defaults for Document Items<br />
Movement type 453 is defaulted<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Storage Location 10<br />
(Enter)<br />
Items<br />
Material HELM_ _ _<br />
Quantity 50<br />
UnE (Unit of Entry) EA<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the material document number _____________________<br />
Display the material and accounting documents.<br />
Re-check the stock status of the material to confirm the “return” stock has been transferred to<br />
unrestricted stock<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 242 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 190: Post Customer Credit<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you prepare to issue a credit, the Billing block must be removed from the<br />
Return’s sales order to proceed with issuing the credit.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Change<br />
Order: Return sales order number<br />
(Enter)<br />
Acknowledge Information pop-up window: “Consider the subsequent documents.”<br />
Delete the entry in the field “Billing block”<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 243 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 191: Create a Billing Document<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create the account payable to the customer for the returned goods.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing Document → Create<br />
Document Return order number<br />
(Enter)<br />
Record the total amount billed to the customer. $____________________<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the billing document number: __________________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 244 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 192: Release Billing Document to Accounting<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to release the billing document to accounting. Before the billing<br />
document can be processed, Sales must release it to Accounting. All credits are automatically blocked<br />
for processing so that they may be reviewed prior to being released to Accounting for payment.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing Document → Change<br />
Billing document Billing Document number<br />
System Menu: Billing Document → Release To Accounting<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 245 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 193: Check Document Flow<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you review the document flow up to this point in the return process.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Change<br />
Document Return Order Number<br />
System Menu: Environment → Display document flow<br />
Review the accounting document created by billing<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 246 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 194: Post Payment to the Customer – Refund<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you post a payment to your customer. Now that they have received the invoice<br />
with the credit you will need to send them a payment. The payment will be reflected in their account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable →<br />
Document Entry → Other → Outgoing Payments<br />
Document Date Today’s date<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Currency/Rate USD<br />
Bank data<br />
Account G/L account for your Bank (Checking Account)<br />
Amount Enter the amount of the payment (from sales order)<br />
Text Returned Goods<br />
Open item selection<br />
Account Customer # for River City Racers, Inc.<br />
Select<br />
Note: The “not assigned” amount should be 0.00<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the document number for this posting ________________<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 247 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
Exercise 195: Check Document Flow<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you review the document flow now that the process is complete.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Change<br />
Document Return Order Number<br />
System Menu: Environment → Display document flow<br />
Review the accounting document – has it been cleared.<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 248 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)<br />
Exercise 196: Check Stock Status on all materials<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →<br />
Environment → Stock → Stock Overview<br />
Database selections<br />
Material: HELM_ _ _<br />
Plant: MI00<br />
Display version: 1<br />
Repeat for ULOK _ _ _ , SADL _ _ _ and PUMP _ _ _<br />
Stock Type<br />
Unrestricted Use<br />
Sales Orders<br />
Scheduled for<br />
Delivery<br />
Quantity<br />
HELM _ _ _<br />
Quantity<br />
ULOK _ _ _<br />
Quantity<br />
PUMP _ _ _<br />
Quantity<br />
SADL _ _ _<br />
ECC 6.0 – Release August 2009 Page 249 Sierra Nevada Peddlers , LLC
mySAP<br />
SRM<br />
mySAP PLM<br />
mySAP<br />
ERP ECC 6.0<br />
mySAP SCM<br />
SAP NetWeaver<br />
<strong>Business</strong> <strong>Process</strong> <strong>Integration</strong> - II<br />
Exercises for GBI data set<br />
(Version 1.0 – Release January 2011)<br />
Modified from Version 4.1 of BPI-II<br />
mySAP<br />
CRM<br />
Version 4.1 – July 2007 ©2007 SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC
Unit 1: <strong>Business</strong> <strong>Process</strong> <strong>Integration</strong> I Review<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
No Exercises for Unit 1<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 1 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Unit 2: Controlling (CO) – Overview and Organizational Structure<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 2 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 1: Create Controlling Area<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise is to create a controlling area with the purpose of tracking costs for Global Bikes Inc. The<br />
controlling area is an organizational unit in accounting used to subdivide the business organization<br />
from a cost accounting standpoint.<br />
A company code is assigned to one and only one controlling area 1:1 relationship. However, to<br />
facilitate cross company code reporting and cost allocation more than one company code can be<br />
assigned to a controlling area 1:n relationship.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Enterprise Structure → Definition→ Controlling → Maintain Controlling Area<br />
Double click on Maintain Controlling Area<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Click on<br />
Insert Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Person Responsible Your user name (if your user name is not predefined, jump to exercise 66<br />
and complete)<br />
Assignment control Controlling area same as company code<br />
Verify the following settings:<br />
Currency type 10 (Company code currency)<br />
Currency USD<br />
Chart of accounts C_ _ _<br />
Fiscal year variant K1<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 3 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 2: Assign Company Code to Controlling Area<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise is to assign the company code to a controlling area. All company codes assigned to a<br />
controlling area must use the same chart of accounts and fiscal year variant. More than one company<br />
can be assigned to the controlling area.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Controlling →<br />
Assign company code to controlling area<br />
Click on the line with your Controlling Area<br />
Double click on Assignment of company code(s)<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Enter C_ _ _<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 4 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 3: Create Cost Center Standard Hierarchy<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise is designed to provide a name for your standard hierarchy. Indicated hierarchy of a cost<br />
center group in which all cost centers in a controlling area are gathered together. All cost centers are<br />
attached to a cost center group which is part of a hierarchy.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Controlling → General Controlling → Organization → Maintain Controlling Area<br />
Double click on Maintain Controlling Area<br />
Click on the line with your Controlling area<br />
System Menu: Goto → Details<br />
CCtr Std Hierarchy: BIKESINC_ _ _<br />
(Save)<br />
Select “YES” to confirm the message<br />
(Back)<br />
Double Click “Activate components/control indicators”<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Fiscal year Current Year<br />
Activate Components<br />
Cost Centers Component active<br />
Order Management Component active<br />
Commit. Management Component active<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 5 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Unit 3: Financial Accounting (FI) – Master Data<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 6 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 4: Create Raw Materials Inventory Account<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise to create GL accounts that will be needed to expand Global Bikes Inc.to<br />
include both controlling and production. Create a Raw Materials Inventory account using your trading<br />
goods inventory account as the reference model. An inventory account is an asset account located in<br />
the Balance Sheet that records the value of the current inventory.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 200_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Balance sheet accounts<br />
Select Radio Button Balance sheet account<br />
Description<br />
Short Text: Raw Materials Inv<br />
G/L Acct Long Text Raw Materials Inventory<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Account Currency USD<br />
Select: “Only balances in local crcy”<br />
Account management in company code<br />
Select: “Line item display”<br />
Sort key: 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
Select “Post automatically only”<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 7 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 5: Create Finished Goods Inventory Account<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise to create GL accounts that will be needed to expand Global Bikes Inc.to<br />
include both controlling and production. Create a Finished Goods Inventory account using your trading<br />
goods inventory account as the reference model. An inventory account is an asset account located in<br />
the Balance Sheet that records the value of the current inventory.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 202_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Balance sheet accounts<br />
Select Radio Button Balance sheet account<br />
Description<br />
Short Text: Finished Goods Inv<br />
G/L Acct Long Text Finished Goods Inventory<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Account Currency USD<br />
Select: “Only balances in local crcy”<br />
Account management in company code<br />
Select: “Line item display”<br />
Sort key: 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
Select “Post automatically only”<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 8 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 6: Create Raw Materials Expense Account<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise to create GL accounts that will be needed to expand Global Bikes Inc.to<br />
include both controlling and production. Create a Raw Materials Expense account using your trading<br />
goods expense account (721_ _ _) as the reference model. An expense account is located in the Profit<br />
and Loss Statement that records the value of the expenses incurred.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 720_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Profit and loss accounts<br />
Select Radio Button P&L statement acct<br />
Description<br />
Short Text: Raw Mat. Consp/Exp<br />
G/L Acct Long Text Raw Materials Consumption / Expense<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Account Currency USD<br />
Select: “Posting without tax allowed”<br />
Account management in company code<br />
Select: “Line item display”<br />
Sort key: 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 9 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 7: Create Finished Goods Expense Account<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise to create GL accounts that will be needed to expand Global Bikes Inc.to<br />
include both controlling and production. Create a Finished Goods Expense account using your trading<br />
goods expense account (721_ _ _) as the reference model. An expense account is located in the Profit<br />
and Loss Statement that records the value of the expenses incurred.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 722_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Profit and loss accounts<br />
Select Radio Button P&L statement acct<br />
Description<br />
Short Text: Fin Goods Consp/Exp<br />
G/L Acct Long Text Finished Goods Consumption / Expense<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Account Currency USD<br />
Select: “Posting without tax allowed”<br />
Account management in company code<br />
Select: “Line item display”<br />
Sort key: 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 10 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 8: Create Labor Expense Account<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise to create GL accounts that will be needed to expand Global Bikes Inc.to<br />
include both controlling and production. Create a Labor Expense account using your rent expense<br />
account (780_ _ _) as a model. An expense account is located in the Profit and Loss Statement that<br />
records the value of the expenses incurred.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 710_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Profit and loss accounts<br />
Select Radio Button P&L statement acct<br />
Description<br />
Short Text: Labor Expense<br />
G/L Acct Long Text Labor Expense<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Account Currency USD<br />
Select: “Posting without tax allowed”<br />
Account management in company code<br />
Select: “Line item display”<br />
Sort key: 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 11 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 9: Create Production Order Settlement Account<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise to create GL accounts that will be needed to expand Global Bikes Inc.to<br />
include both controlling and production. Create a Production Order Settlement account using your rent<br />
expense account (780_ _ _) as a model. An expense account is located in the Profit and Loss<br />
Statement that records the value of the expenses incurred.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 731_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Profit and loss accounts<br />
Select Radio Button P&L statement acct<br />
Description<br />
Short Text: Prod Ord Settle Exp<br />
G/L Acct Long Text Production Order Settlement Expense<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Account Currency USD<br />
Select: “Posting without tax allowed”<br />
Account management in company code<br />
Select: “Line item display”<br />
Sort key: 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 12 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 10: Create Production Variance Account<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise to create GL accounts that will be needed to expand Global Bikes Inc.to<br />
include both controlling and production. Create a Production Variance account using your rent<br />
expense account (780_ _ _) as a model. An expense account is located in the Profit and Loss<br />
Statement that records the value of the expenses incurred.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →<br />
G/L Accounts → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Centrally<br />
G/L Account: 762_ _ _<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Type/Description TAB<br />
Control in chart of accounts<br />
Account Group Profit and loss accounts<br />
Select Radio Button P&L statement acct<br />
Description<br />
Short Text: Prod Var Exp<br />
G/L Acct Long Text Production Variance Expense<br />
Control Data TAB<br />
Account control in company code<br />
Account Currency USD<br />
Select: “Posting without tax allowed”<br />
Account management in company code<br />
Select: “Line item display”<br />
Sort key: 001<br />
Create/bank/interest TAB<br />
Control of document creation in company code<br />
Field status group: ZALL<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 13 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Unit 4: Controlling (CO) – Master Data<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 14 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 11: Maintain Cost Center Standard Hierarchy<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create the following cost center structure. This will enable you to<br />
capture costs in a manner which is meaningful to you. A cost center is an area of responsibility within a<br />
company, which causes and influences costs. In this exercise create the Cost centers listed below.<br />
(Please make sure you assign the Cost centers to the correct group of your standard hierarchy.)<br />
BIKES_ _ _ (Standard Hierarchy)<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
ADMIN_ _ _ (Cost Center Group / Hierarchy Area)<br />
ADMIN Cost Centers<br />
A005 – Acct-Finance (category = W )<br />
A010 – Administration (category = W )<br />
A015 – Purchasing (category = G )<br />
A020 – Information Tech. (category = H )<br />
SALES_ _ _ (Cost Center Group / Hierarchy Area)<br />
SALES Cost Centers<br />
S005 – Sales (category = V )<br />
S010 – Marketing (category = V )<br />
DIST_ _ _ (Cost Center Group / Hierarchy Area)<br />
DISTRIBUTION – PRODUCTION Cost Centers<br />
D005 – Warehouse (category = F )<br />
D010 – Production (category = F )<br />
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Master Data →<br />
Standard Hierarchy → Change<br />
The system may ask you to enter the Controlling area<br />
Enter: C_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on Standard Hierarchy: BIKES_ _ _<br />
Group name Bike_ _ _ Standard Cost Hierarchy<br />
(Create)<br />
Select Lower-Level Group<br />
Group Name = ADMIN_ _ _<br />
Description = Administration<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 15 The Rushmore Group, LLC
(Create)<br />
Select Group at Same Level<br />
Group Name = SALES_ _ _<br />
Description = Sales<br />
(Create)<br />
Select Group at Same Level<br />
Group Name = DIST_ _ _<br />
Description = Distribution/Production<br />
(Enter)<br />
Click on ADMIN_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Select Cost Center<br />
Create the ADMIN Cost Centers:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
o A005 – Accounting/Finance (cost center category = W ) Save and (Create)<br />
o A010 – Administration (cost center category = W ) Save and (Create)<br />
o A015 – Purchasing (cost center category = G ) Save and (Create)<br />
o A020 – Information Tech (cost center category = H ) Save<br />
Valid from: 01/01/20_ _ (Current Year) to: 12/31/9999<br />
Organization Tab (for all Cost Centers)<br />
Currency: USD<br />
Indicators Tab (for all Cost Centers)<br />
Remove the check mark from Commitment update<br />
Click on SALES_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Select Cost Center<br />
Create the SALES Cost Centers:<br />
o S005 – Sales (cost center category = V )<br />
o S010 – Marketing (cost center category = V )<br />
Click on DIST_ _ _<br />
(Create)<br />
Select Cost Center<br />
Create the DIST Cost Centers:<br />
o D005 – Warehouse (cost center category = F )<br />
o D010 – Production (cost center category = F )<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 16 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 12: Create Primary Cost Elements<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise creates the primary cost elements. Primary cost elements have a one to one relationship<br />
with the PL expense accounts in the GL. The primary cost elements are the link between FI and CO,<br />
they are used for entering costs within the entire accounting system, it is a cost that originates outside<br />
of the company.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Element Accounting → Master Data →<br />
Cost Element → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Create Primary<br />
Trans Code<br />
Create Primary cost elements for the listed expense accounts:<br />
Cost Element From table below (e.g.710000)<br />
Valid From: 01/01/20_ _ (Current Year) to: 12/31/9999<br />
Select or (Enter)<br />
Basic Data TAB<br />
CElem category 1<br />
(Save) and repeat for each primary cost element<br />
For Cost Element 770_ _ _ (Information Technologies Expense)<br />
Default Acct Assignmt Tab<br />
Cost Center A020 *** See Below for Accounts that need this ***<br />
Cost Element Description Cost element category Default Account Assign<br />
(Account)<br />
710_ _ _ Labor Expense 1<br />
720_ _ _ Raw Materials Consumption Expense 1<br />
721_ _ _ Trading Goods Consumption Expense 1<br />
722_ _ _ Finished Goods Consumption Expense 1 D010<br />
731_ _ _ Production order settlement Expense 22<br />
740_ _ _ Supplies Expense 1<br />
750_ _ _ Utilities Expense 1<br />
760_ _ _ Purchase Price Difference Expense 1<br />
762_ _ _ Production Variance Expense 1 D010<br />
770_ _ _ Information Technology Expense 1 A020<br />
780_ _ _ Rent Expense 1<br />
781_ _ _ Miscellaneous Expense 1<br />
790_ _ _ Cost of Goods Sold 1 D010<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 17 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 13: Create Secondary Cost Elements<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise enables the creation of secondary cost elements. Secondary cost elements are used<br />
when the original identity of the cost in not directly related to the transaction.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Element Accounting → Master Data →<br />
Cost Element → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Create Secondary<br />
Cost element Name/Description Cost element category<br />
800_ _ _ Labor 43 (Internal Activity)<br />
810_ _ _ IT Assessed costs 42 (Assessment)<br />
820_ _ _ Internal Orders Settlement 21 (Internal Settlement)<br />
830_ _ _ Production Order Settlement 21 (Internal Settlement)<br />
For each of the above cost elements enter the following information:<br />
Cost element: Enter number (e.g.800_ _ _)<br />
Valid From: 01/01/20_ _ (Current Year) to: 12/31/9999<br />
Select or (Enter)<br />
Name/Description: see above list<br />
Cost element category see above list<br />
(Save) and repeat for each secondary cost element<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 18 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 14: Create Cost Element Groups<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise is used to create cost element groups. These groups facilitate working with the cost<br />
elements. A cost element “group” is an organizational unit consisting of a particular collection of cost<br />
elements.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Element Accounting → Master Data →<br />
Cost Element Group → Create<br />
For Example:<br />
Code Cost Element Group<br />
TOTAL_ _ _ Total Cost Elements for C_ _ _<br />
PCOST_ _ _ Total Primary Cost Elements for C_ _ _<br />
SCOST_ _ _ Total Secondary Cost Elements for C_ _ _<br />
Create the following Cost element group structure with the following information:<br />
Cost element group: TOTAL_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Enter name of Cost Element Group: Total Cost Elements for C_ _ _<br />
Click on : PCOST_ _ _<br />
Description: Total Primary Cost Elements for C_ _ _<br />
Click on : SCOST_ _ _<br />
Description: Total Secondary Cost Elements for C_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Click on PCOST_ _ _<br />
Select<br />
Enter value interval 700000 - 799999<br />
(Enter)<br />
Click on SCOST_ _ _<br />
Select<br />
Enter value interval 800000 - 899999<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 19 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 15: Create Statistical Key Figure<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise is used to create a statistical key figure that will be used as the basis for distribution of<br />
rent and utilities. Statistical key figures can be used in calculations, reports and other internal cost<br />
allocation tools like assessment and distribution (e.g. square footage, headcount, personnel count,<br />
phones, etc.).<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Master Data →<br />
Statistical Key Figures → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Create<br />
Stat. key figure: SQFT<br />
(Enter)<br />
Basic data<br />
Name Square Footage<br />
Stat. key fig. UnM. FT2<br />
Key fig. cat. Fxd Val.<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 20 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Unit 5: Controlling (CO) – Rules<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 21 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 16: Create Controlling (CO) Document Number Ranges<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will assign different types of controlling documents to specific number ranges. Since<br />
SAP is a document based system, each document must be assigned a number within a given number<br />
range made available to the document type being created.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Controlling → General Controlling → Organization →<br />
Maintain Number Ranges for Controlling Documents<br />
Press Copy button<br />
From:<br />
To: C_ _ _<br />
(Copy)<br />
Acknowledge the message to review the intervals<br />
(Continue) to accept the message<br />
CO Area: C_ _ _<br />
Select<br />
Review intervals<br />
(Back)<br />
Display groups<br />
Review groups<br />
(Back)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 22 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 17: Define Controlling (CO) Settlement Document Number<br />
Ranges<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will define the number range for internal order settlement documents in Controlling. You<br />
will assign your controlling area to a group which has been assigned to a number range.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Controlling → Internal Orders → Actual Postings → Settlement →<br />
Maintain Number Ranges for Settlement Documents<br />
<br />
Select Group Without Text<br />
In the “Not Assigned” section, double click on your C_ _ _ (make sure it changes color)<br />
<br />
Your C_ _ _ should now be assigned to the Group without text<br />
(Save)<br />
Acknowledge the message to review the intervals<br />
(Continue) to accept the message<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 23 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Unit 6: Controlling (CO) – Transactions<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 24 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 18: Post Invoice from Vendor<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to post an incoming rent invoice to your accounting system. If you have<br />
properly implemented controlling, you will be prompted to enter a cost center if you do not put one in<br />
while completing the entry of the invoice.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Document Entry →<br />
Invoice<br />
INVOICE # 123 Brewers Bikes Leasing, Inc.<br />
CURRENT Month Rent 1500.00<br />
Total $1,500.00<br />
Vendor Vendor # for Brewers Bikes Leasing<br />
Invoice date Today<br />
Amount $1,500<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
If your Company Code did not default in, Click on Change leading company code and enter yours.<br />
G/L acct 780_ _ _ (Rent Expense)<br />
D/C Debit<br />
Amount in doc curr. $1,500<br />
Cost Center A010<br />
(Enter)<br />
Use the button to see if the postings are correct.<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 25 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 19: Post Payment to Vendor<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to make payment to your landlord to settle the rent invoice.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Document Entry →<br />
Outgoing Payment → Post<br />
Document Date: (Enter today's Date)<br />
Company Code: C_ _ _<br />
Currency: USD<br />
Bank data<br />
Account: 100_ _ _<br />
Amount: Enter amount total from invoice<br />
Open items selection<br />
Account: Enter the # for Brewers Bikes Leasing _ _<br />
<br />
Find YOUR invoice- gross document from the previous exercise<br />
Watch the “Assigned” field as you do the next step.<br />
Double-click on the USD Gross amount of your document.<br />
<strong>Process</strong>ing status should now show:<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Amount entered: Amount total from invoice<br />
Assigned: Amount total from invoice<br />
Difference postings:<br />
Not assigned: 0.00<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 26 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 20: Display Individual Line Items<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to display the line items for a cost center and cost element.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Information System →<br />
Reports for Cost Center Accounting → Line items →<br />
Cost Centers: Actual Line Items<br />
Cost Center: A010<br />
Cost Element: 780_ _ _ (Rent Expense)<br />
Note: Clear cost element group and cost center group<br />
Posting Date: Set range to current month or keep defaults<br />
(Execute)<br />
Double click on the Rent Expense line item<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 27 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 21: Repost Expense (Cost) Between Cost Centers<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to demonstrate the ability to repost costs between cost centers. While<br />
some of us are certainly flawless, not all have been so blessed. In this exercise you will repost the rent<br />
that was incorrectly posted to cost center A010 (Administration). It should have been posted to cost<br />
center A005 (Accounting/Finance).<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Actual Postings →<br />
Repost Line Items→ Enter<br />
To find the document enter the following information:<br />
Controlling Area C_ _ _ (If prompted)<br />
(Enter)<br />
Accounting Doc.<br />
Document Number (from the posted Invoice)<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Fiscal Year 20_ _ (Current Year)<br />
(Execute)<br />
Acct Assgt 1 A005<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 28 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 22: Display Individual Line Items<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to display the line items for a cost center and cost element to see that<br />
the reposting has been completed as expected.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Information System →<br />
Reports for Cost Center Accounting → Line items →<br />
Cost Centers: Actual Line Items<br />
Cost Center: A005 to A010<br />
Cost Element: 780_ _ _ (Rent Expense)<br />
Note: Clear cost element group and cost center group<br />
Posting Date: Set range to current month<br />
(Execute)<br />
Double click on line items shown<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 29 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Unit 7: Controlling (CO) – Transactions<br />
Distributions and Assessments<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 30 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 23: Post Statistical Key Figure<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will be used to establish how rent (and subsequently utilities) will be treated at the end of<br />
the month. Since we do not wish to create a journal entry with many lines each time we pay rent, we<br />
can use an established distribution cycle to move the rent (and subsequently utilities) from a cost<br />
center to all the cost centers that have responsibility for this cost. The rent expense has been reposted<br />
to the Accounting/Finance cost center, A005. At the end of the month the rent expense will be<br />
distributed to all the company’s cost centers based on their respective square footage, therefore it is<br />
necessary for us to record the number of square feet each cost center occupies.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Actual Postings →<br />
Statistical Key Figures → Enter<br />
System Menu: Extras → Set Controlling Area…<br />
Controlling Area C_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Entry Data Tab<br />
Doc. Date Today<br />
Postg Date Today<br />
Select Scrn var. Cost center<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Rec. CCtr StatKF Total Quantity<br />
A005 SQFT 400<br />
A010 SQFT 600<br />
A015 SQFT 150<br />
A020 SQFT 100<br />
S005 SQFT 200<br />
S010 SQFT 100<br />
D005 SQFT 900<br />
D010 SQFT 550<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 31 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 24: Create G/L Document Entry<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
In addition to rent, Global Bikes Inc.incurs utility costs. This exercise will have you post the journal<br />
entry for the monthly utilities expense of $578 to the G/L Utilities expense account (using cost center<br />
A005).<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Posting →<br />
Enter G/L Account Document<br />
Basic data Tab<br />
Document Date Today<br />
Currency USD<br />
G/L acct 750_ _ _ (Utilities Expense Account)<br />
D/C Choose Debit<br />
Amount in doc. curr. $578<br />
Cost center A005<br />
On Next Line Enter:<br />
G/L acct 100_ _ _(Bank – Checking)<br />
D/C Choose Credit<br />
Amount in doc. curr. $578<br />
(Enter)<br />
Use the button to see if the postings are correct.<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 32 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 25: Create Distribution Cycle<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise is used to demonstrate the value of period-end distributions. A distribution is designed<br />
for cost center allocation. Distributions are used only for primary costs. In periodic reposting and<br />
distributions, costs are removed from one cost center and placed (charged) to another cost center and<br />
they retain their original cost element definition.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Instructor note:<br />
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting →Period-End Closing →<br />
Single Functions → Allocations → Distribution<br />
The first time in the system may trip an error indicating that you must execute report RK811XST.<br />
This can be accomplished from the Error dialog box by double clicking on the proceed button.<br />
Set Controlling area =<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Parameters<br />
C_ _ _ (if requested)<br />
Period 01 to 12<br />
Fiscal Year 20_ _ (Current Year)<br />
System Menu: Extras → Cycle → Create<br />
Cycle Bike_ _ _<br />
Start Date 01/01/20_ _ (Current Year)<br />
(Enter)<br />
Text Monthly distributions<br />
Make sure Indicators field does not have “Iterative” checked!<br />
This will create a segment of this distribution cycle for distributing rent to the<br />
applicable cost centers.<br />
Select:<br />
Segment Name Rent, Distribution of rent<br />
Segment Header Tab Accept defaults<br />
Sender/Receivers Tab<br />
Sender<br />
Cost Center A005<br />
Cost Element<br />
Receivers<br />
780_ _ _<br />
Cost Center (under) Group BIKESINC_ _ _<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 33 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Receiver Tracing Factor Tab<br />
Var. portion type: Actual stat. key figures<br />
(Enter)<br />
Selection Criteria<br />
Stat. key fig. From SQFT<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
This will create a segment of this distribution cycle for distributing utilities to the<br />
applicable cost centers.<br />
Select:<br />
Segment Name<br />
Segment Header Tab<br />
Utilities, Distribution of utilities<br />
Accept defaults<br />
Senders/Receivers Tab<br />
Sender<br />
Cost Center A005<br />
Cost Element<br />
Receivers<br />
750_ _ _<br />
Cost Center Group<br />
Receiver Tracing Factor Tab<br />
BIKESINC_ _ _<br />
Var. portion type Actual stat. key figures<br />
(Enter)<br />
Selection Criteria<br />
Stat. key fig. From SQFT<br />
(Save)<br />
(Back) to the “Execute Actual Distribution: Initial Screen”<br />
YES or (Save)<br />
Enter Cycle Bikes_ _ _<br />
Start Date 01/01/20_ _ (Current Year)<br />
(Execute) the distribution cycle with the Test run indicator checked<br />
Double click on the warning indicator<br />
Note: You should expect warning messages indicating that the system can not find input data for the<br />
months previous to the current month.<br />
Double click on the Monthly Distributions line<br />
Review the distribution<br />
After the distribution cycle has been executed without any unexpected errors return to the Execute Actual<br />
Distribution: Initial Screen.<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 34 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Remove the check from the Test run indicator on the Execute Actual Distribution: Initial Screen<br />
(Execute) the distribution cycle again<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 35 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 26: Review Actual Line Item Report<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to review the cost centers to see how the distribution did not change the<br />
original cost element definition.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Information System →<br />
Reports for Cost Center Accounting → Line items →<br />
Cost Centers: Actual Line Items<br />
Cost Center A000 to ZZZZ<br />
(Execute)<br />
Review the report<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 36 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 27: Post Information Supplies Expense<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This is the first of two journal entries used to demonstrate the difference between a distribution and an<br />
assessment. While both distributions and assessments are periodic allocations, they are quite different<br />
in on substantive way - the original identity of the costs is not important to the receiver.<br />
This exercise will have you post a journal entry for the supplies expense of $500 to the G/L Supplies<br />
expense account (using cost center A020).<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Posting →<br />
Enter G/L Account Document<br />
Basic data Tab<br />
Document Date Today<br />
Currency USD<br />
G/L acct 740_ _ _ (Supplies Expense Account)<br />
D/C Choose Debit<br />
Amount in doc curr. $500<br />
Cost center A020<br />
On Next Line Enter:<br />
G/L acct 100_ _ _(Bank - Checking)<br />
D/C Choose Credit<br />
Amount in doc curr. $500<br />
(Enter)<br />
Use the button to see if the postings are correct.<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 37 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 28: Post Information Technology Expense<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This is the second of two journal entries used to demonstrate the difference between a distribution and<br />
an assessment.<br />
This exercise will have you post a journal entry for software purchased for the business of $4,200 to the<br />
G/L Information Technology Expense Account (using cost center A020).<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General ledger → Posting →<br />
Enter GL account document<br />
Basic data Tab<br />
Document Date Today<br />
Currency USD<br />
G/L acct 770_ _ _ (Information Technology Expense Account)<br />
D/C Choose Debit<br />
Amount in doc curr. $4,200<br />
Cost center A020<br />
On Next Line Enter:<br />
G/L acct 100_ _ _(Bank - Checking)<br />
D/C Choose Credit<br />
Amount in doc curr. $4,200<br />
(Enter)<br />
Use the button to see if the postings are correct.<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 38 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 29: Review Actual Line Item Report<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
In this exercise, you will review and record the costs that are currently in cost center A020. This should<br />
include rent and utilities from the previous distribution along with the two new journal entries that have<br />
just been completed.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Information System →<br />
Reports for Cost Center Accounting → Line items →<br />
Cost Centers: Actual Line Items<br />
Cost Center A020<br />
(Execute)<br />
Review the report<br />
Record the line items included in this cost center<br />
Cost Element Cost Element Name Val. In Rep. Cur.<br />
Total<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 39 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 30: Create Assessment Cycle<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise is used to demonstrate the value of period-end assessments. An assessment is<br />
designed for cost center allocation. Assessments are used for primary and secondary costs. With<br />
assessments, costs are removed from one cost center and placed (charged) to another cost center<br />
while not retaining their original cost element definitions since the composition of costs is not important<br />
for the receiver. For example, receiver cost centers rarely require detailed breakdowns of cafeteria<br />
costs.<br />
This exercise will enable the costs in A020 to be assessed to all other cost centers. The four expenses<br />
(charges) included in the sender cost center will be assessed out to all other cost centers based upon a<br />
fixed percentage. These costs include rent, utilities, supplies, and some software.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Period-End Closing →<br />
Single Functions → Allocations → Assessment<br />
Set Controlling Area = C_ _ _ (if requested)<br />
Parameters<br />
Period 01 to 12<br />
Fiscal Year 20_ _ (current year)<br />
System Menu: Extras → Cycle → Create<br />
Cycle ASS_ _ _<br />
Start Date 01/01/20_ _ (Current year)<br />
(Enter)<br />
Text Monthly assessments<br />
Note: Make sure Indicators field does not have “Iterative” checked.<br />
Click<br />
Segment Name IT Costs<br />
Description Assessment of IT Costs<br />
Segment Header Tab<br />
Assessment cost element 810_ _ _<br />
Receiver tracing factor:<br />
Receiver rule Fixed Percentages<br />
Senders/Receivers Tab<br />
Sender<br />
Cost Center A020<br />
Cost Element Group BCOST_ _ _<br />
Receivers<br />
Cost Center Group BIKES_ _ _<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 40 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Receiving Tracing Factor Tab<br />
% for Cost center A005 15<br />
% for Cost center A010 5<br />
% for Cost center A015 10<br />
% for Cost center A020 0<br />
% for Cost center D005 30<br />
% for Cost center D010 10<br />
% for Cost center S005 20<br />
% for Cost center S010 10<br />
(Enter)<br />
Validate that the assessment is for 100 percent of the costs<br />
(Save)<br />
(Back) to the “Execute Actual Assessment: Initial Screen”<br />
Yes to Save<br />
Enter Cycle ASS_ _ _<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
(Execute) the assessment cycle with the Test run indicator checked<br />
After the assessment cycle has been executed without any errors, go back and remove the check<br />
from the Test run indicator on the Execute Actual Assessment: Initial Screen.<br />
(Execute) the assessment cycle again.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 41 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 31: Review Actual Line Item Report<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you review how the assessment moved costs from A020 to the other cost<br />
centers as assessed costs with no indication as to the identification of the origin of the cost (rent,<br />
utilities, supplies, etc.).<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Information System →<br />
Reports for Cost Center Accounting → Line items →<br />
Cost Centers: Actual Line Items<br />
Cost center A000 to ZZZZ<br />
Cost element 810_ _ _<br />
(Execute)<br />
Review the report<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 42 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Unit 8: Controlling (CO) – Transactions<br />
Internal Order<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 43 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 32: Create Internal Order Type<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will take you through the process of creating your own internal order type. In SAP, it is<br />
not good practice to alter the setting of the original document types. As such, we have identified an<br />
internal order type that is close to what we need. We will copy that to our own order type Z_ _ _ and<br />
then make the adjustment we would like and then use our internal order type for creating our internal<br />
order.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Controlling → Internal Orders → Order Master Data →Define Order Types<br />
Select 0400 (Internal Order – Marketing)<br />
(Copy As)<br />
Order Type Z_ _ _ (_ _ _ Internal Order)<br />
(Copy)<br />
Select Z_ _ _ (_ _ _ Internal Order)<br />
(Details)<br />
General parameters<br />
Settlement prof. 20 (Overhead costs)<br />
Control indicators<br />
Remove (uncheck) Classification<br />
Status management<br />
Select Release immediately<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 44 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 33: Maintain and Configure Internal Order Settlement<br />
Structure<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to configure a settlement structure for our internal order prior to using it.<br />
This will allow us to use secondary cost elements to move the costs associated with our internal order<br />
to settlement cost centers.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Controlling → Internal Orders → Actual Postings → Settlement →<br />
Maintain Allocation Structures<br />
Select: A1 (CO allocation structure)<br />
Double click on: Assignments<br />
Select 020 (Raw-/service material consump.)<br />
Double Click Settlement cost elements<br />
Select<br />
Receiver cat. CTR (Cost center)<br />
By cost element Not Selected<br />
Settlement cost elem 820_ _ _<br />
(Back) twice<br />
Select: 030 (Other costs)<br />
Double click on Source<br />
Cost Elem. Group TOTAL_ _ _<br />
Double click on Settlement cost elements<br />
Select<br />
Receiver cat. CTR (Cost center)<br />
By cost element Not Selected<br />
Settlement cost elem 820_ _ _<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 45 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 34: Create and Release Internal Order (Company Meeting)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The annual company meeting is coming up in the near future. It will be held in St. Thomas and<br />
everyone will be involved. The initial bills are now coming in and as such an internal order needs to be<br />
created to in order to capture the costs of the meeting. Later the costs of the meeting will be settled out<br />
to all the departments (i.e. cost centers) in the company. While management requested the meeting,<br />
the marketing department is in charge of arranging the meeting and the accounting department will<br />
create the internal order to monitor costs.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
(Create)<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Controlling→ Internal Orders→ Master Data→ Order Manager<br />
Order Type Z_ _ _<br />
(If needed set your controlling area by: System Menu: Environment → Set CO area)<br />
(Enter)<br />
Description Company Meeting<br />
Assignments Tab<br />
Responsible CCtr S010<br />
Requesting CCtr A010<br />
Click (Settlement Rule)<br />
Maintain Settlement Rule: Overview Screen<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Cat. Receiver #. %<br />
CTR A005 15<br />
CTR A010 5<br />
CTR A015 10<br />
CTR A020 10<br />
CTR D005 10<br />
CTR D010 25<br />
CTR S005 15<br />
CTR S010 10<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 46 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 35: Post Payment to Vendor<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise posts to your miscellaneous expense account (781_ _ _) using the internal order you just<br />
created as the cost object. The transaction represents a payment to Princess Cruise Lines in the<br />
amount of $6,000.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Posting →<br />
Enter G/L Account Document<br />
Basic data Tab<br />
Document Date Today<br />
Currency USD<br />
G/L acct 781_ _ _ (Miscellaneous Expense)<br />
D/C Choose Debit<br />
Amount in doc. curr. $ 6,000<br />
Order Enter Internal Order Number<br />
On Next Line Enter:<br />
G/L acct 100_ _ _(Bank - Checking)<br />
D/C Choose Credit<br />
Amount in doc. curr. $ 6,000<br />
(Enter)<br />
to see if the postings are correct.<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 47 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 36: Display Individual Line Items<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to review the costs that are now part of your internal order.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Controlling → Internal Orders → Information System →<br />
Reports for Internal Orders → Line Items → Orders: Actual Line Items<br />
Order Your internal order number<br />
Posting Date yesterday through today or keep the default values<br />
(Execute)<br />
Double click on line items shown<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 48 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 37: Create Purchase Requisition for Consumption to<br />
Internal Order (Company Meeting)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The company meeting is going to be a gala event. Distinctive premier bikes will be created and given<br />
to the boat’s staff and crew. The marketing group has requested 20 for staff and 20 for crew members.<br />
This exercise creates a purchase requisition to support the need for 40 pens.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Requisition →<br />
Create<br />
Item Overview Section<br />
A (Acct. Assignment Cat.) F (Order)<br />
Delivery Date (Enter a date – 7 days from today)<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Stor. Loc. 10<br />
PGr _ _ _<br />
Material BIKE-A_ _ _<br />
Quantity 40<br />
Item Section<br />
Account Assignment Tab<br />
G/L Account 721_ _ _ (Trading Goods Expense account)<br />
Order Internal Order # you created<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 49 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 38: Create Purchase Order<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create a purchase order with reference to the requisition. When you<br />
create with reference to a purchase requisition, the account assignment gets copied from the purchase<br />
requisition. It cannot be changed or deleted via the PO.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Create →<br />
Vendor Unknown<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Order Type NB<br />
Purchasing group _ _ _<br />
Select<br />
Enter your Reference Purchase Requisition number.<br />
(Enter)<br />
Click on the green select all button.<br />
Click on the button to copy the details from the purchase requisition into your new<br />
purchase order.<br />
Select<br />
Select Premier bikes _ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Enter)<br />
Click on the green select all button.<br />
(Generate)<br />
Click on “Open Requisitions” in the Document overview area.<br />
Select (Adopt)<br />
Select (Item Overview)<br />
Close (Item Details)<br />
Select (Header) review PO total $ value<br />
Record the Purchase Orders expected Net value $ _________<br />
(Save)<br />
Save anyway past the message indicating that no output device (ie. Printer, EDI, FAX) was found.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 50 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 39: Create Goods Receipt<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to record the delivery of the items to the receiving area. This is the<br />
second part of the 3 way match process – quantities against the purchase order.<br />
Shipping Bill of Lading Premier Bikes<br />
ITEMS: QUANTITY:<br />
BIKE-A_ _ _ 40<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →<br />
Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order →<br />
GR for Purchase Order (MIGO)<br />
Enter your PO # PO # from previous exercise<br />
(Execute) (Located to the right of the PO number field)<br />
Ensure each line item “OK” box is checked (If items are not tagged as “OK” then scroll down and<br />
check the OK box on the lower part of the screen).<br />
Hint: To have the system automatically propose the items, goto System Menu: Settings→ Default<br />
values and check the “Propose the OK function in future” box.<br />
Select or (Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 51 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 40: Post Invoice Receipt from Vendor<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to enter the invoice for the pens. This is the third part of the three-way<br />
match process – cost matching.<br />
Premier Bikes INVOICE: 2007-01254<br />
ITEMS: QUANTITY PER PRICE<br />
BIKE-A_ _ _ 40 $3.00 $120.00<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Logistics Invoice Verification →<br />
Document Entry → Enter Invoice<br />
Basic data Tab<br />
Invoice date (Enter today's Date)<br />
Enter Currency USD<br />
PO Number PO #<br />
(Enter)<br />
Amount: (from the above physical invoice document)<br />
Tax code: XI (Input Tax)<br />
(Enter)<br />
Click on the button.<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 52 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 41: Post Payment to Vendor<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you post the outgoing payment to the vendor for the pens. You are requested<br />
to clear the invoice amount by posting an outgoing payment using your bank account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Document Entry →<br />
Outgoing Payment → Post<br />
Document Date Today<br />
Bank data<br />
Account 100_ _ _ (Bank - Checking)<br />
Amount Amount from previous exercise invoice<br />
Text Invoice from Premier Bikes #2007-01254<br />
Open items selection:<br />
Account Vendor # for Premier Bikes<br />
All other settings remain unchanged.<br />
Select<br />
Double Click on the USD Gross you want to make payment against.<br />
Ensure the Not Assigned balance is 0.00.<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 53 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 42: Review Cleared Items<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to review the vendor line items and verify that the invoice is cleared.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Account →<br />
Display/Change Line Items<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Vendor Selection<br />
Vendor account Vendor # for Premier Bikes<br />
Company code C_ _ _<br />
Line item selection: Status<br />
Select All items<br />
(Execute)<br />
Review for Open items<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 54 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 43: Display Individual Line Items<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to review the costs that are now part of your internal order.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Controlling → Internal Orders → Information System →<br />
Reports for Internal Orders → Line Items → Orders: Actual Line Items<br />
Order Your internal order number<br />
Posting Data<br />
Posting Date yesterday through today or keep the default values<br />
(Execute)<br />
Double click on line items shown for more information.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 55 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 44: Settle Internal Order (Company Meeting)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to settle the internal order. You can settle the costs collected on an<br />
internal order to different receivers. During system configuration you defined a settlement profile which<br />
specifies the valid receivers for each order type. For example, you might specify that capital spending<br />
orders can be settled to assets, but the company meeting will be settled to the costs centers based<br />
upon the settlement rule created when the internal order was initially created.<br />
It is now the end of the month and time to settle the expenses to the internal order for the company<br />
meeting to all the cost centers.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Controlling → Internal Orders → Period–End Closing →<br />
Single Functions → Settlement → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing<br />
Order your order number<br />
Parameters<br />
Settlement period current period<br />
Posting period current period<br />
Fiscal Year current year<br />
(Execute)<br />
(Detail lists)<br />
Review how the cost will be allocated to the various cost centers.<br />
Once the order settlement has been executed without any errors<br />
Remove the check from the Test run indicator on the Actual Settlement: Order screen.<br />
(Execute) the settlement again.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 56 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 45: Review Actual Line Item Report<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you review you cost centers from A000 to ZZZZ. You will see your distributed,<br />
assessed and internal order costs.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Information System →<br />
Reports for Cost Center Accounting → Line items →<br />
Cost Centers: Actual Line Items<br />
Cost Center A000 to ZZZZ<br />
Cost Element Group Total _ _ _<br />
(Execute)<br />
Review the report<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 57 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Unit 9: Production Planning – Overview<br />
No Exercises for Unit 9<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 58 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Unit 10: Production Planning – Organizational Structure, Master Data,<br />
and Rules<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 59 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 46: Maintain Plant Parameters for Production Planning<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
In this step, you can specify the plant parameters for material requirements planning. These<br />
parameters include number ranges for orders, scheduling preferences, and assigning schedule<br />
controllers.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Materials Management → Consumption-Based Planning → Plant Parameters →<br />
Carry Out Overall Maintenance of Plant Parameters<br />
Verify the following information:<br />
Click on the maintain button.<br />
Enter your plant: P_ _ _<br />
Click on the maintain button.<br />
Environment Click on the button<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Assign no. range 01 to your plant (Back)<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Assign no. range 01 to your plant (Back)<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Assign no. range 01 to your plant (Back)<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Assign no. range 01 to your plant (Back)<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Assign no. range 01 to your plant (Back ) twice<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 60 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Master data<br />
Click on button.<br />
Plant: P_ _ _<br />
MRP controller _ _ _ and description<br />
(Back)<br />
(Exit)<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Plant: P_ _ _<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Scheduling margin key: _ _ _ (Student Number - Default)<br />
Op.Per: 1 (Workdays prior to order start)<br />
Fl BefrePr: 1 (Workdays between order start and scheduled start)<br />
Fl.AfterPr: 1 (Workdays between order due date and scheduled finish date)<br />
Rel Per: 1 (Workdays in release period)<br />
(Back)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 61 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 47: Define Storage Location<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
Register the storage locations where stock is physically/logically kept within the plant. These may be<br />
buildings, areas, or other defined locations.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Enterprise structure → Definition → Materials Management →<br />
Maintain storage location<br />
Enter your Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Click on the button.<br />
S Loc 30<br />
Description Raw Material Inv<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 62 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 48: Create Production Scheduling Profile<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
Define the rules for scheduling production orders. This will allow the automatic release of an order<br />
when the order is created. You can use this function if you do not need time for preparatory activities<br />
between creating and releasing an order.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Production → Shop Floor Control → Master Data →<br />
Define production scheduling profile<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Prod. Sched. Profile:<br />
Automatic Actions<br />
10 (Release & Schedule)<br />
On Creation - check Release<br />
On Release - check Schedule Order<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 63 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 49: Create Production Scheduler<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
You can assign a production scheduling profile to a material or a production scheduler. In this case we<br />
will assign it to an individual who will be responsible for the production of the finished goods.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Production → Shop Floor Control → Master Data → Define production scheduler<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
ProdSched: _ _ _<br />
Description: Your name<br />
ProdProfile 10<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 64 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 50: Control Parameters for Material Requirements Planning<br />
(MRP)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The Control parameters for MRP define how the MRP planning system will run. It defines how<br />
requirements will be checked, the type of order to propose, which type of BOM/Routing per order<br />
should be chose, and how it should be scheduled for each plant.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Production → Material Requirements Planning → Plant Parameters →<br />
Carry Out Maintenance of Plant Parameters<br />
These are the same tables that were visited when creating plant parameters for MRP<br />
Review and update the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Enter your plant: P_ _ _<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Maintain Planned Orders<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Production order PP01 (Standard Production Order)<br />
(Save) (Back) three times<br />
Click on the<br />
Select your plant<br />
button.<br />
Enter checking rule PP<br />
(Save) (Back)<br />
Maintain Environment<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Check Display List<br />
Verify 1 for frequency<br />
(Save) (Back) twice<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 65 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Maintain Planning Run<br />
Click on the button.<br />
BOM Sel ID. 01<br />
Routing Sel ID. 01<br />
(Save)<br />
(Enter) Enter past information message.<br />
(Back)<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Select<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Order type * (All)<br />
ProdScheduler * (All)<br />
Rough-cut scheduling<br />
SelID:roughPlng 03<br />
Scheduling control for detailed scheduling<br />
Scheduling Type Backwards<br />
(Save) (Back)<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Determining the planned delivery time<br />
Check Scheduling: Info Rec/Agreemt<br />
Creation of delivery schedules<br />
Schedule lines 3 (Schedule Lines)<br />
Account assignment of non-valuated material<br />
Unknown Acct Assignment U (Unknown)<br />
(Save) (Back) twice<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Planning horizon 15 days<br />
(Save)<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 66 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 51: Assign Availability Check to Order Type<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
Specify what stock situations are to be considered as “available”.<br />
In checking control, you can define for each order type and checking rule which type of check is to be<br />
used for the material availability check:<br />
• No automatic check when an order is created, released or partially<br />
• ATP check<br />
• Check against planning<br />
• Check when an order is saved<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Availability Check →<br />
Define Checking Control<br />
Select the lines for Plant 0001, Order Type PP01 and <strong>Business</strong> Functions 1 and 2<br />
(Copy)<br />
Plant P_ _ _ <strong>Business</strong> function 1<br />
Select “no check” for all availability categories.<br />
(Copy)<br />
Plant P_ _ _ <strong>Business</strong> function 2<br />
Select “no check” only for PRT and Capacity. Make sure Material Availability does not have a check.<br />
(Copy<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 67 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 52: Define Scheduling Parameters for Operations<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
In this step you define for each plant, order type and production scheduler the parameters for<br />
scheduling production orders. This comprises maintaining:<br />
1. Scheduling levels (detailed, production-rate and rough-cut scheduling)<br />
2. Date adjustment when dates are exceeded<br />
3. Date control for detailed scheduling<br />
4. Reduction<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Scheduling →<br />
Define Scheduling Parameters for Production Orders<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Order Type PP01<br />
ProdScheduler: _ _ _<br />
Detailed Scheduling<br />
Select Generate Capacity Reqs.<br />
Scheduling control for detailed scheduling<br />
Scheduling Type Backwards<br />
Select Automatic Scheduling<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 68 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 53: Define Control Parameters for Order Type<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
In this exercise you will define the parameters that are valid for each order type and plant.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Production → Shop Floor Control → Master Data → Order →<br />
Define order type-dBikeCdent parameters<br />
Create the following order-dependent parameters for your plant:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Order Type PP01<br />
Planning Tab<br />
Routing<br />
Routing Selection 6 Routing Mandatory (automatic selection)<br />
Bill of Material<br />
BOM Application PP01 (Production – general)<br />
(Enter)<br />
Controlling Tab<br />
Controlling<br />
Cstg variant planned PPP1 (Production Order Planned)<br />
Cstg variant actual PPP2 (Production Order Actual)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 69 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 54: Create Confirmation Parameters<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
In this exercise you will define whether the system proposes a partial confirmation, a final confirmation<br />
or a final confirmation with withdrawal posting of open reservations for the confirmation.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Confirmation →<br />
Define Confirmation Parameters<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Order Type PP01<br />
General individual entry Tab-<br />
Confirmation function except fast entry<br />
Confirm. type Final confirmation<br />
Post open reservations Checked<br />
Error handling/logs<br />
Act. costs Checked<br />
Goods movements Checked<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 70 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 55: Define Valuation for Goods Received<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you define which valuation variant will be used for goods received from<br />
production. In other words, how are the goods going to be costed.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Production → Shop Floor Control → <strong>Integration</strong> →<br />
Define Valuation of Goods Received<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Val. Area (plant) P_ _ _<br />
Valuation Variant (Val. Var.) 007 (Production Order – Actual)<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 71 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Unit 11: Production Planning – Master Data<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 72 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 56: Create Material Master for Raw Materials<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create the raw materials necessary to produce the new pens. Each<br />
specific view contains relevant data. This is the basic information used for purchasing, costing,<br />
production, and all areas in the ERP system.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material →<br />
Create (Special) → Raw Material<br />
Enter the following information using the information from the list below:<br />
Enter industry sector Retail<br />
System Menu: Defaults→ Industry Sector Retail<br />
Select Hide industry sector on initial screen<br />
(Continue)<br />
System Menu: Defaults→ Views<br />
Select (Deselect all)<br />
Select the following views: Basic data 1<br />
Purchasing<br />
MRP 1<br />
MRP 2<br />
MRP 3<br />
Work Scheduling<br />
General Plant Data/Storage 1<br />
Accounting 1<br />
Costing 1<br />
Select View selection only on request<br />
Select Create views selected<br />
(Continue)<br />
System Menu: Default→ Organization levels… Copy from…<br />
Company code: C_ _ _ C_ _ _<br />
Plant: P_ _ _ P_ _ _<br />
Leave storage location blank (storage locations will be created automatically)<br />
Select Org. levels/profiles only on request<br />
(Continue)<br />
Enter material code: (Repeat the steps for each of the material in the following chart)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 73 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Material HandBar_ _ _ Grip _ _ _ Frame_ _ _ Wheel_ _ _<br />
Basic data 1 View<br />
Description Handle Bar Grip Frame Band<br />
Base Unit of Measure Each Each Each Each<br />
Material Group 01 01 01 01<br />
Gross & Net Weight / Unit 10 oz 2 oz 70 oz 11 oz<br />
Purchasing View<br />
Purchasing Group _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _<br />
MRP 1 View<br />
MRP Type PD PD PD PD<br />
MRP Controller _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _<br />
Lot Size EX EX EX EX<br />
Minimum Lot Size 12 100 12 40<br />
Fixed lot size<br />
MRP 2 View<br />
Planned Deliv. Time 3 3 3 3<br />
SchedMargin key _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _<br />
Safety Stock 20 100 20 40<br />
MRP 3 View<br />
Availability check 02 02 02 02<br />
Accounting 1 View<br />
Value Class 3000 3000 3000 3000<br />
Moving price / Price Unit $ 40.00 / 1 $ 2.50 / 10 $ 104.00 / 1 $ 24.00 / 1<br />
Costing 1 View<br />
With Qty Structure √ √ √ √<br />
Material origin √ √ √ √<br />
(Save) after each material<br />
Continue on next page……<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 74 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Material Tire_ _ _ Fork _ _ _ Stand_ _ _ Tube_ _ _<br />
Basic data 1 View<br />
Description Tire Seat Kick Stand Tube<br />
Base Unit of Measure Each Each Each Each<br />
Material Group 01 01 01 01<br />
Gross & Net Weight / Unit 10 oz 9 oz 5 oz 7 oz<br />
Purchasing View<br />
Purchasing Group _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _<br />
MRP 1 View<br />
MRP Type PD PD PD RP<br />
Reorder Point 20<br />
MRP Controller _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _<br />
Lot Size EX EX FX FX<br />
Minimum Lot Size 60<br />
Fixed lot size 24 20<br />
MRP 2 View<br />
Planned Deliv. Time 1 1 2 5<br />
SchedMargin key _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _<br />
Safety Stock 40 20 48 20<br />
MRP 3 View<br />
Availability check 02 02 02 02<br />
Accounting 1 View<br />
Value Class 3000 3000 3000 3000<br />
Moving price / Price Unit $ 93.60/ 10 $ 45.00 / 10 $ 30.00 / 10 $ 2.00 / 1<br />
Costing 1 View<br />
With Qty Structure √ √ √ √<br />
Material origin √ √ √ √<br />
(Save) after each material<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
HandBar _ _ _<br />
Grip _ _ _<br />
Frame _ _ _<br />
Band _ _<br />
Tire_ _ _<br />
Fork _ _ _<br />
Stand _ _ _<br />
Tube_ _ _<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 75 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 57: Create Material Master for Finished Products<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you create your finished products. Each specific view contains relevant data.<br />
This is the basic information used for purchasing, costing, production, and all areas in the ERP system.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material →<br />
Create (Special) → Finished Product<br />
Use the information provided in the previous exercise to help you create the Finished Products<br />
System Menu: Defaults→ Industry Sector Retail<br />
(Enter)<br />
System Menu: Defaults→ Views<br />
Select the following views: Basic data 1<br />
Sales: Sales Org. Data 1<br />
Sales: Sales Org. Data 2<br />
Sales: General/Plant Data<br />
MRP 1<br />
MRP 2<br />
MRP 3<br />
Work Scheduling<br />
General Plant Data/Storage<br />
Accounting 1<br />
Costing 1<br />
Select View selection only on request<br />
Select Create views selected<br />
(Enter)<br />
System Menu: Default→ Organization levels… Copy from…<br />
Company code: C_ _ _ C_ _ _<br />
Plant: P_ _ _ P_ _ _<br />
Sales org: S_ _ _ S_ _ _<br />
Distribution channel:* RE RE<br />
Create the above materials for distribution channel Retail (RE) then change the defaults and continue this<br />
process to create each material for distribution channel Wholesale (WH).<br />
(Enter)<br />
Enter Material: (Repeat the steps for each of the material in the following chart)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 76 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Material BikeC_ _ _ RiderKit_ _ _<br />
Basic Data 1 View<br />
Description Custom Bike Accessory Pack<br />
Base Unit of Measure Each Each<br />
Material Group 01 01<br />
Gross & Net Weight / Unit 10 lb 3 lb<br />
Sales: Sales org. 1 View<br />
Division 01 01<br />
Delivering Plant P_ _ _ P_ _ _<br />
Tax Jurisdict.Code 0 0<br />
County Sales Tax 0 0<br />
City Sales Tax 0 0<br />
Scale quantity 1 1<br />
Amount RE: 390,<br />
WH:325<br />
(back)<br />
Sales: Sales org. 2 View<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
RE:45, WH: 35<br />
Matl statistics grp 1 1<br />
Sales: General/Plant Data View<br />
Availability check 02 02<br />
Trans. Grp 0001 0001<br />
Loading Grp Hand Hand<br />
MRP 1 View<br />
MRP Type M1 M1<br />
Planning time fence 10 10<br />
MRP Controller _ _ _ _ _ _<br />
Lot size EX EX<br />
Minimum Lot Size 10 10<br />
MRP 2 View<br />
In-house production 5 5<br />
Planned Deliv. Time 2 2<br />
SchedMargin key _ _ _ _ _ _<br />
Safety Stock 10 10<br />
MRP 3 View<br />
Strategy group 40 40<br />
Consumption mode 1 1<br />
Bwd consumption per. 30 30<br />
Availability check 02 02<br />
Continued on next page…<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 77 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Material BikeC_ _ _ RiderKit_ _ _<br />
Work Scheduling<br />
Production scheduler _ _ _ _ _ _<br />
Prod.Sched.Profile 10 10<br />
Accounting 1 View<br />
Value Class 7920 7920<br />
Price Control S S<br />
Price Unit 1 1<br />
Standard price $ 225 $ 23.25<br />
Costing 1 View<br />
With Qty Structure √ √<br />
Material origin √ √<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 78 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 58: Create Vendor Master Records Centrally<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise demonstrates creating both purchasing and accounting specific vendor partner data at<br />
once.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Master Data → Vendor →<br />
Central → Create<br />
Create all views for a new vendor called BikeParts _ _ _.<br />
Vendor Leave Blank (system will generate the new number)<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Purchasing Organization P_ _ _<br />
Account group KRED<br />
Create Vendor: Address<br />
Reference<br />
Vendor Account # for Premier bikes _ _ _<br />
Company code C_ _ _<br />
PurchasingOrganization P_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Name<br />
Enter the vendor’s name Bike Parts_ _ _<br />
Search Term<br />
Search term _ _ _ (Your Student Number)<br />
Street Address<br />
Postal code 72803<br />
City Flagstaff<br />
Country US<br />
Region AZ<br />
Communication<br />
Language English<br />
(Enter)<br />
Note: Page forward past views that do not contain relevant information…<br />
Create Vendor: Control N/A<br />
Create Vendor: Payment transactions N/A<br />
Create Vendor: Accounting information Accounting<br />
Recon. account: 300_ _ _<br />
Create Vendor: Payment transaction Accounting<br />
Payt Term: 0001<br />
Select Chk double inv.<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 79 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Create Vendor: Correspondence Accounting N/A<br />
Create Vendor: Purchasing data<br />
Order currency: USD<br />
Terms of paymt: 0001<br />
Create Vendor: Partner Functions N/A<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 80 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Unit 12: Material Management - Transactions<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 81 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 59: Create Purchase Order<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
Create a purchase order for initial supply of raw material used in production. The quantities purchased<br />
are in multiple units per pricing unit.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path:<br />
Trans Code:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order →<br />
Create → Vendor/Supplying Plant Known<br />
Enter the following information in the Create Production Order Screen:<br />
Vendor Enter number code for Bike Parts_ _ _<br />
Order all Raw Materials using the following information.<br />
Material PO Net Currency Per OPU Deliv. Date Plant<br />
Quantity Price<br />
HANDBAR_ _ _ 48 40.00 USD 1 EA (Future date) P_ _ _<br />
GRIP_ _ _ 200 2.50 USD 10 EA (Future date) P_ _ _<br />
FRAME_ _ _ 48 104.00 USD 1 EA (Future date) P_ _ _<br />
WHEEL_ _ _ 100 24.00 USD 1 EA (Future date) P_ _ _<br />
TIRE_ _ _ 120 93.60 USD 10 EA (Future date) P_ _ _<br />
FORK_ _ _ 60 45.00 USD 10 EA (Future date) P_ _ _<br />
STAND_ _ _ 100 30.00 USD 10 EA (Future date) P_ _ _<br />
TUBE_ _ _ 120 2.00 USD 1 EA (Future date) P_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Review the information pulled from the master data<br />
(Save)<br />
<br />
Review the messages generated.<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 82 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 60: Create Goods Receipt<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
Receive the raw material into inventory. This is the second part of the 3 way match process –<br />
quantities against the purchase order.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path:<br />
Trans Code:<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management→<br />
Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order →<br />
PO Number Known<br />
Enter the PO number 4500000???( next to the Purchase order field) It should turn red on the left<br />
column when selected.<br />
(Execute)<br />
Ensure each line item OK is checked<br />
Or<br />
Settings → Default values<br />
Select propose the OK function<br />
Select Suggest all items.<br />
(Enter)<br />
Storage Location 30 for each line item<br />
Select or (Post)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 83 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 61: Maintain Automatic Account Assignments<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
In this exercise the system settings for controlling automatic postings to G/L accounts for Inventory<br />
Management movements, costing differences, and offsetting accounts are defined. Some of these<br />
accounts were defined in BPI-I and others in BPI-II.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Materials Management → Valuation and Account Assignment →<br />
Account Determination → Account Determination Without Wizard →<br />
Configure Automatic Postings<br />
Follow the next few pages to create the automatic postings rules for the following functions:<br />
Enter accounting assignment information for the following transaction keys:<br />
Field Name Key<br />
Inventory Posting BSX<br />
Offsetting Entry for Inventory Postings GBB<br />
Cost (price) Difference PRD<br />
GR/IR clearing account WRX<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Inventory Posting<br />
Double click on Transaction Event Key BSX<br />
Chart of Accounts C_ _ _<br />
Transaction Event Key BSX<br />
Enter the following automatic account assignments:<br />
Valuation Valuation class Account Account Name<br />
G_ _ _ 3000 Raw Materials Inventory Account<br />
G_ _ _ 7920 Finished Goods Inventory Account<br />
(Save) (Back)<br />
continued on next page…<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 84 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Offsetting Entry for Inventory Posting<br />
Double click on Transaction Event Key GBB<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Transaction Event Key GBB<br />
Enter the following automatic account assignments:<br />
Valuation General Valuation Account Account<br />
Modification class<br />
Name<br />
G_ _ _ (Blank) 3000 Raw Material Expense Account<br />
G_ _ _ AUF 7920 Production Order Settlement Acct.<br />
G_ _ _ VAX 7920 Cost of Goods Sold Account<br />
G_ _ _ VBR 3000 Raw Material Expense Account<br />
(Save) (Back)<br />
Cost (price) difference<br />
Double click on Transaction Event Key PRD<br />
Transaction Event Key PRD<br />
Enter the following automatic account assignments:<br />
Valuation Valuation class Account Account Name<br />
G_ _ _ 3000 762_ _ _ Production Variance Account<br />
G_ _ _ 7920 762_ _ _ Production Variance Account<br />
(Save) (Back)<br />
Goods receipt / inv. receipt clearing acct<br />
Double click on Transaction Event Key WRX<br />
Transaction Event Key WRX<br />
Enter the following automatic account assignments:<br />
Valuation Valuation class Account Account Name<br />
G_ _ _ 3000 GR/IR Account<br />
G_ _ _ 7920 GR/IR Account<br />
(Save) (Back)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 85 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 62: Post Invoice Receipt from Vendor<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The vendor will send a bill – invoice. In this exercise the invoice for the raw materials from the vendor<br />
is entered. This is the third part of the three-way match process – cost matching against the purchase<br />
order.<br />
Bike Parts Invoice # : 2007-_ _ _<br />
ITEMS QUANTITY PRICE PER UM<br />
HANDBAR 48 40.00 USD 1 EA<br />
GRIP 200 2.50 USD 10 EA<br />
CAP 48 104.00 USD 1 EA<br />
BAND 100 24.00 USD 1 EA<br />
CARTRIDGE 120 93.60 USD 10 EA<br />
FORK 60 45.00 USD 10 EA<br />
STAND 100 30.00 USD 10 EA<br />
TUBE 120 2.00 USD 1 EA<br />
Thank you for your order<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Logistics Invoice Verification →<br />
Document Entry → Enter Invoice<br />
Basic data Tab<br />
Invoice date (Enter today's Date)<br />
Check your Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Currency USD<br />
PO Number (from previous exercise)<br />
(Enter)<br />
Amount (Reference physical invoice above)<br />
(Enter)<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Debits should equal credits with a balance of 0<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
TOTAL $26984.00<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 86 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 63: Display Vendors Invoice (Gross) Document<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will assist you find a document number from the previous exercise’s recording the invoice<br />
document number.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management → Logistics Invoice Verification →<br />
Further <strong>Process</strong>ing → Display Invoice Document<br />
Invoice Document No 510000####<br />
Fiscal year 20_ _ (Current Year)<br />
<br />
<br />
Review Posting from Invoice Entry<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 87 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 64: Post Payment to Vendors<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
If the receipt of the goods, the vendors invoice and the purchase order are within tolerance the vendor<br />
will be eligible for payment. Here the payment to the vendor will be generated.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Document Entry →<br />
Outgoing Payment → Post<br />
Document Date (Enter today's Date)<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Currency/Rate USD<br />
Bank data<br />
Account 100_ _ _<br />
Amount Amount from Bike Parts Invoice<br />
Open items selection<br />
Account: Enter the code number for Bike Parts_ _ _<br />
<br />
Find YOUR invoice- gross document from the previous exercise<br />
Watch the “Assigned” field as you do the next step.<br />
Double-click on the USD Gross amount of your document.<br />
<strong>Process</strong>ing status should now show:<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Amount entered: Total Amount from invoice<br />
Assigned: Total Amount from invoice<br />
Difference postings:<br />
Not assigned: 0.00<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 88 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Unit 13: Production Planning – Master Data<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 89 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 65: Create Bill of Material<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you create a Bill of Material (BOM). The BOM is a list of components needed to<br />
create the end product. In the case of the BikeC it has two ea of wheels, tires and tubes, a frame<br />
(frame sets are complete with front forks, cranks and peddles, and chain) handlebar, and seat. The<br />
Rider kit adds the grips and kickstand.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material → Bill of Material →<br />
Material BOM → Create<br />
Enter the following information to create a bill of material for each of the products:<br />
Material: BIKEC_ _ _ and RIDERKIT_ _ _<br />
Plant: P_ _ _.<br />
BOM Usage: 1 (Production).<br />
(Enter)<br />
Material Tab<br />
Enter the following line items:<br />
BikeC_ _ _ RiderKit_ _ _<br />
Item category (ICt) Component Quantity Component Quantity<br />
L HandBar_ _ _ 1 BIKEC_ _ _ 1<br />
L Tube_ _ _ 1 ULOK_ _ _ 1<br />
L Frame_ _ _ 1 HELM_ _ _ 1<br />
L Wheel_ _ _ 1 PUMP_ _ _ 1<br />
L Fork_ _ _ 1<br />
L Tire_ _ _ 2<br />
L SADL _ _ _ 1<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 90 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 66: Create Person Responsible for Work Center<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
Each work center must have someone designated as the responsible party. Without the HR module,<br />
“people” do not exist in the system. Therefore, we must create a list of positions/people responsible for<br />
the work centers within the production data. This parameter will be linked to your Work Center.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Production → Basic Data → Work Center → General Data →<br />
Determine person responsible<br />
You may have done this at the beginning of the exercise set<br />
(Note: You may be prompted to enter your controlling area C_ _ _)<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Plnt P_ _ _<br />
Pers. Respons. _ _ _<br />
Person responsible for work center Your name<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 91 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 67: Create Work Center Location<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This will register the physical locations for the work centers to be assigned. This work center will be<br />
assigned to the plant you defined in BPI-I.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Logistics – General → Define Location<br />
To create your work center location enter the following information:<br />
Select<br />
Plnt P_ _ _<br />
Location _ _ _<br />
Name Bldg _ _ _<br />
Select (Address)<br />
Country US<br />
Region CA<br />
Language English<br />
(Copy)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 92 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 68: Review Work Center Control Keys<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
Control keys determine what set of control parameters/activities will be conducted at a work center.<br />
This will be linked to your Work Center.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Production → Basic Data → Work Center → Routing Data → Define control key<br />
Review the following information:<br />
(Change -> Display)<br />
Select Control Key: ASSY<br />
(Details)<br />
Review selected indicators:<br />
(Exit)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Scheduling<br />
Det. Cap, Reqmnts<br />
Cost<br />
Confirmations required<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 93 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 69: Create Capacity<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
Capacity is the ability to perform a specific task, such as labor or machines. You can define individual<br />
capacities for each capacity, for instance the work load employees are capable of could be in the<br />
capacity category Labor or in the capacity category machine 5 lathes. The capacity contains; the<br />
operating time, the available capacity, and formulas for calculating capacity requirements. A work<br />
center capacity is created in the work center and is directly assigned to the work center.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Production → Master Data → Work Centers → Capacity → Create<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Capacity SHIFT<br />
Capacity category 002 (Person)<br />
(Enter)<br />
Capacity description Standard Day Shift<br />
General data<br />
Capacity planner grp A<br />
Available capacity<br />
Factory calendar ID US<br />
Base unit of meas. MIN<br />
Standard available capacity<br />
Start 08:00:00<br />
Finish 17:00:00<br />
Length of breaks 01:00:00<br />
Capacity utilization 85<br />
No of indiv. cap. 4<br />
Capacity H<br />
Planning details<br />
Check “Relevant to finite scheduling”<br />
Check “Long-term planning”.<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 94 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 70: Create Activity Type Labor (Labor Hours)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
Activity type: is a unit of measure for allocating internal activities according to usage. The activity type<br />
is what is used for costing the orders. Here labor is defined and a cost element is assigned to the<br />
activity type (labor).<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Master Data →<br />
Activity Type → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing → Create<br />
System Menu: Extras → Set Controlling area C_ _ _<br />
Activity Type Labor<br />
Valid From 01 / 01 / 20_ _ (current Year)<br />
Valid to 12 / 31 / 9999<br />
(Enter)<br />
Basic data Tab<br />
Names<br />
Name Labor Hours<br />
Description Labor Hours<br />
Basic data<br />
Activity Unit H (Hours)<br />
CCtr categories F (Production)<br />
Allocation default values<br />
ATyp category 1 (Manual entry, manual allocation)<br />
Allocation cost elem 800_ _ _<br />
Price indicator 001<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 95 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 71: Set Activity Prices<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
You specify fixed and variable costs for planned activity. These costs define the planned operating<br />
costs for production. In addition, we can define the planned capacity for the cost centers.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Planning →<br />
Activities Output/Prices → Change<br />
Variables<br />
Version 0<br />
From Period 01<br />
To Period 12<br />
Fiscal year 20_ _ (Current Year)<br />
Cost Center group DIST_ _ _<br />
Activity Type Labor<br />
Entry<br />
Check Entry Free<br />
(Overview)<br />
D005 Warehouse<br />
Plan Activity 100000 hours<br />
Variable price USD $15.00<br />
Use to switch between the cost centers belonging to the group you have selected<br />
D010 Production<br />
Plan Activity 100000 hours<br />
Variable price USD $20.00<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 96 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 72: Create Work Centers for Production<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
Production operations are carried out at a work center. In the R/3 System work centers represent;<br />
machines or machine groups, production lines, assembly work centers, and employees or groups of<br />
employees. Together with bills of material and routings, work centers belong to the most important<br />
master data in the R/3 production planning and control system. In this exercise we will define the work<br />
centers, their location, capacity calculation, scheduling, costing, and normal work hours. These will be<br />
the foundation for capacity, scheduling, and production.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Production → Master Data → Work Centers → Work Center → Create<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Work Center WC_ _ _<br />
Basic data<br />
Work center cat 0003 (Labor).<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Work center description Assembly line<br />
Basic data Tab<br />
General Data<br />
Person responsible _ _ _<br />
Location _ _ _<br />
Usage 009 (All task list types)<br />
Standard Value Maintenance<br />
Standard value key SAP1 (Normal Production).<br />
(Enter) to display the selections associated with the standard value key SAP1.<br />
Setup ”should be entered”.<br />
Labor “should be entered”.<br />
Default values Tab<br />
Operation default values<br />
Control key ASSY<br />
Units of measure of standard values<br />
Select “MIN” (Minute) for Defaults for Units of measure of standard values-Setup and Labor.<br />
Capacities Tab<br />
Overview<br />
Capacity category: 002 (Person)<br />
Setup formula: SAP005 (Prod.: Setup requirement).<br />
<strong>Process</strong>ing formula: SAP007 (Prod.: Labor requirement).<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 97 The Rushmore Group, LLC
System Menu: Goto → Capacity → Header<br />
Capacity category description Standard Day Shift<br />
General data<br />
Capacity planner grp A<br />
Available capacity<br />
Factory calendar ID US<br />
Base unit of meas. H (Hour)<br />
Standard available capacity<br />
Start 08:00:00<br />
Finish 17:00:00<br />
Length of breaks 01:00:00<br />
Capacity utilization 85<br />
No of indiv. Frame 4<br />
Planning details<br />
Check “Relevant to finite scheduling”<br />
Check “Long-term planning”<br />
(Back)<br />
Scheduling Tab<br />
Scheduling basis<br />
Capacity category 002 (Person)<br />
Capacity SHIFT<br />
Execution time<br />
Setup formula SAP001 (Prod.: Setup time).<br />
<strong>Process</strong>ing formula SAP003 (Prod.: Labor time).<br />
Costing Tab<br />
Link to cost center/activity types<br />
Cost Center D010<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Activity Overview<br />
Activity Description Activity Type Activity Unit Formula Keys<br />
Setup: Labor MIN SAP005<br />
Labor: Labor MIN SAP007<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 98 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 73: Create Finished Products Routing<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
A routing is a description of which operations and the order in which they are carried out. Routings<br />
also contain details about the work centers, labor time, machining time, setup time, and components<br />
assigned at each operation.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings → Routings →<br />
Standard Routings → Create<br />
Material BIKEC_ _ _<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
General data<br />
Usage 1 (Production)<br />
Status 4 (released-general).<br />
Click on the overview button.<br />
Enter data for each operation: (Be sure to include the work center and control key for each operation.)<br />
Operations Work center Control key Description<br />
0010 WC_ _ _ ASSY Place Forks on Frame<br />
0020 WC_ _ _ ASSY Place Tires and Tubes on Wheels<br />
0030 WC_ _ _ ASSY Place Wheels saddle and handlebar on<br />
Frame<br />
(Enter)<br />
Makeup and Enter times for Setup and Labor for each activity (6 to 7 minutes for each operation<br />
will have your costs come in close to the standard costs used in the material master).<br />
Hit after each entry<br />
Next task… Component allocation (see Next page)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 99 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Create a Routing for Finished Product (Component Allocation)<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
After the operational steps are laid out the components must be allocated to the individual operations.<br />
This is a progressive process where each operation builds off the materials that entered production in the<br />
previous operations.<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Select the materials required for operation 0010: Fork, Frame<br />
Select<br />
Allocate these components to operation: 10<br />
(Enter)<br />
Select the materials required for operation 0020: Wheels, tubes and Tires<br />
Select<br />
Allocate these components to operation: 20<br />
(Enter)<br />
Select the materials required for operation 0030: Saddle and Handlebar<br />
Select<br />
Allocate these components to operation: 30<br />
(Enter)<br />
<br />
(Operation Graphic) to display the routing graphically.<br />
(Back)<br />
(Save)<br />
Repeat the above process to create a routing for the RIDERKIT_ _ _. All components will be allocated to<br />
operation 10 by default because it is the only operation. Therefore, you do NOT need to do the<br />
component allocation.<br />
Operations Work center Control key Description<br />
0010 WC_ _ _ ASSY Pack ULOK, HELM and PUMP in<br />
RiderKit<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 100 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 74: Display Routing List<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
Use this reporting function to confirm creation of your routings and the material allocations.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings → Reporting → Print List<br />
Task List Type N (Routing)<br />
Material BIKEC _ _ _<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Select For All Alternatives BOMs<br />
(Execute)<br />
Review report<br />
(Back)<br />
Select Display Component Assignment<br />
(Execute)<br />
Review additional information<br />
(Back)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 101 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Unit 14: Production Planning – Transactions<br />
Sales and Operations Planning (SOP)<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 102 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 75: Create Product Group<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
A product group combines other product groups and materials according to whatever criteria best meet<br />
the needs of your enterprise; for example, manufacturing procedure, product design, or market niche.<br />
The product group can be used at a higher level in forecasting than end items. This enables you to<br />
forecast at the group level and the system will then determine the individual requirements at the end<br />
item level.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics Production SOP Product Group Create<br />
Product group PGBike_ _ _<br />
Description Custom Bike & Accessory Pack<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Base Unit EA<br />
Members<br />
Select Materials<br />
(Enter)<br />
Member number BIKEC_ _ _<br />
Plnt P_ _ _<br />
Proportion 75<br />
Member number RIDERKIT_ _ _<br />
Plnt P_ _ _<br />
Proportion 25<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 103 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 76: Create a Production Plan<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
Enter a 9-month sales plan and create a production plan. This exercise will be setting the sales<br />
expectations for the next 9 months for the product group defined in the previous exercise. Generally,<br />
this would be considered a manual forecast. From this ‘forecast’ a production plan can be generated.<br />
This production plan be changed or modified by the production supervisor.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Production → SOP → Planning → For Product Group → Change<br />
Product group PGBike_ _ _<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Version selection<br />
Version Selection<br />
Record your version number (A00)<br />
Version Number<br />
(Enter)<br />
SOP: plan individual product group<br />
Planning Table<br />
Current<br />
month<br />
Current<br />
month +1<br />
Current<br />
month +2<br />
Current<br />
month +3<br />
Current<br />
month +4<br />
Current<br />
month +5<br />
Current<br />
month +6<br />
Current<br />
month +7<br />
Current<br />
month +8<br />
Sales<br />
Production<br />
Stock level<br />
Days of Supply<br />
20 20 20 25 25 25 30 30 30<br />
Target Days of Supply 4 4 4 4 6 6 6 6 6<br />
(Enter)<br />
Note the impact on stock levels<br />
System Menu: Edit→ Create productn plan→ Sunchronus to sales<br />
Note the impact on production plan and stock levels.<br />
System Menu: Edit→ Create productn plan→ Target days’ supply<br />
Note the impact on production plan and stock levels.<br />
Record the planning values in the chart above<br />
Current<br />
month +9<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 104 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Select for a graphic view of your planning data<br />
Review the Planning Graphs<br />
(Back)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 105 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 77: Display Stock/Requirements List<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The Stock/requirements list is a dynamic list. It will change whenever a transaction occurs. At this<br />
point we want to get a BEFORE picture of the status of supplies on hand and the demand against it.<br />
The report should show that there is none in stock, but also list a demand of 100 for the safety stock we<br />
designated on the material master.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Individual access Tab<br />
Logistics → Production → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Requirements List<br />
Material BIKEC _ _ _<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Your Stock/Requirements report should contain this information:<br />
Date MRP… MRP Element data Rec./Req. Qty Available Qty<br />
MM/DD/YY Stock 0 0<br />
MM/DD/YY SafeSt Safety stock 10- 10-<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 106 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 78: Transfer Planning Data to Demand Management<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
Previously, the production plan was generated based upon the sales plan for the product group. This<br />
exercise will use that plan for the group and break it down into the individual components for the end<br />
item material based upon the proportional factors of the product group.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Production → SOP → Disaggregation →<br />
Transfer Product Group to Planning<br />
Product group PGBike_ _ _<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Version Your Version Number Recorded from Exercise 76<br />
Transfer strategy and period<br />
Select Prod plan for mat or PG members as proportion of PG<br />
Select Invisible transfer<br />
Independent requirement specifications<br />
Select Active<br />
<br />
(Back)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 107 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 79: Review Demand Management<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
In reviewing the requirements for the product group we now see there are production requirements for<br />
the individual production items. In reviewing the group we will see the production plan for the<br />
RIDERKIT and BIKEC.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Production → Production Planning →Demand Management →<br />
Planned Independent Requirements → Display<br />
Planned independent requirements for<br />
Select Product Group PGBike_ _ _<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Notice the planned values for PGBIKE are now independent demand at the material level for BIKEC<br />
and RIDERKIT.<br />
(Back)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 108 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 80: Display Stock/Requirements List<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The Stock/requirements list is a dynamic list. It will change whenever a transaction occurs. At this<br />
point we want to get a before picture of the status of supplies on hand and the demand against it. The<br />
report should show that there is none in stock, but also list a demand of 100 for the safety stock we<br />
designated on the material master.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Individual access Tab<br />
Logistics → Production → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Requirements List<br />
Material BIKEC _ _ _<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Record your Stock/Requirements report information.<br />
Date MRP… MRP Element data Rec./Req. Qty Available Qty<br />
MM/DD/YY Stock 0 0<br />
MM/DD/YY SafeSt Safety stock 10- 10-<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 109 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Unit 15: Comprehensive Test of <strong>Business</strong> Case Scenario<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 110 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 81: Run Master Production Schedule<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
When the MPS planning is run the product group requirements will be converted to planned orders to<br />
be executed on the shop floor thus creating a lower level demand for components and also meeting the<br />
forecast demand with finished product.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Production → Production Planning → MPS → MPS →<br />
Total Planning → Online<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
MRP control parameters<br />
<strong>Process</strong>ing key NETCH<br />
Create purchase req. 2<br />
Schedule lines 3<br />
Create MRP list 1<br />
Planning mode 1<br />
Scheduling 1<br />
<strong>Process</strong> MRP materials Select<br />
(Enter) A warning message appears stating “Please check input parameters”<br />
(Enter) again to confirm and bypass the warning message<br />
To start the planning run, press continue<br />
Record materials planned<br />
Materials Comments<br />
(Exit)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 111 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 82: Display Stock/Requirements List<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The Stock/requirements list is a dynamic list. It will change whenever a transaction occurs.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information<br />
Logistics → Production → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Requirements List<br />
Individual access Tab<br />
Material BIKEC_ _ _<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Select the first planned order and click to review the pegged requirements.<br />
(Back)<br />
Select the first planned order again and click on to review the order report.<br />
Here you can view the availability status of the raw materials for your order. If you double click on<br />
one of the raw materials you will see the stock requirements screen for that item in the bottom half of<br />
the screen.<br />
Double click on BIKEC_ _ _<br />
Select<br />
Select the planned order above the Dep Req for RIDERKIT_ _ _ and click to review the pegged<br />
requirements. You should see that this planned order is for the product RIDERKIT. Notice the<br />
planned order spans multiple months, this is because we have a lot size minimum on BIKEC of 100.<br />
(Back)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 112 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 83: Convert Planned Order to Production Order<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The MRP run has created production recommendations to supply the MPS demand created when MPS<br />
was run. The stock requirements list displays the suggested planned orders from the MPS run and will<br />
satisfy it by converting the planned order on the stock/requirements list to a production order.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information<br />
Logistics → Production → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Requirements List<br />
Individual access Tab<br />
Material BIKEC_ _ _<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Double click on the first planned order to be converted.<br />
Click on the button<br />
Notice the release is automatically carried out.<br />
Change Total Qty to 10<br />
Accept all other default information<br />
Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Select the button to refresh the Stock/Requirements List<br />
Notice the MRP elements change from the old PldOrd to display the new PrdOrd.<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 113 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 84: Issue Goods to Production Order<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
Goods being issues to the production order consumes them from inventory. The BOM defined the<br />
standard what should be used to make the finished goods times the quantity being made. This is the<br />
standard and barring any production changes, what is going to be consumed in the making of the<br />
finished goods. Once issued the costs of the material are assumed by the production order and the<br />
raw material inventory is decremented.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Goods Movements →<br />
Goods Issue<br />
Posting Date Today<br />
Defaults for Document Items<br />
Movement Type 261 (goods issue to consumption for order from warehouse)<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Storage Location 30 (Raw Material Inv)<br />
Click on the reference button.<br />
Enter your Production Order number<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Click on the button to accept the details for each material.<br />
Review the Goods Issue Sheet<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 114 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 85: Confirm Production Completion<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This step tells the system the actual quantity of finished product that was produced and the time of<br />
production. Optionally, you can do partial completions, scrap or rework.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistic → Production → Shop Floor Control → Confirmation → Enter→<br />
For Order<br />
Enter your Production Order number.<br />
(Enter)<br />
Confirmation Type<br />
Click on final confirmation.<br />
Actual Data<br />
Yield to conf. 10<br />
Execution start change to 1 hour earlier than default time<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 115 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 86: Receipt of Goods from Production Order<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
With the goods receipt the just completed finished goods are moved to inventory from the end of the<br />
production line. These are now available for sales or shipment. This is the second part of the 3 way<br />
match process – quantities against the purchase order.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Goods Movements →<br />
Goods Receipt<br />
Defaults for Document Items<br />
Movement Type 101 (Order to warehouse)<br />
Order Production Order number<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Storage Location 10 (Inventory)<br />
Select<br />
Click on the button to accept the details for the new pens received from production.<br />
Review your Goods Receipt Document.<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 116 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 87: Settle Costs of Production Order<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
Cost settlement determines the actual costs vs. the planned cost and any variances in the production<br />
order. This information can be drilled down upon to find the individual cost components and<br />
transactions. Managers use this information to discover the source of any variances in production<br />
orders.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Period-End Closing →<br />
Settlement → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Controlling Area C_ _ _ (If required)<br />
Order Production Order number<br />
Parameters<br />
Settlement period Current month<br />
Posting period Current month<br />
(Execute)<br />
(Details lists)<br />
System Menu: Environment → Report<br />
Choose report Orders: Actual/Plan/Variance<br />
(Choose)<br />
Review report<br />
(Back) to the Actual Settlement: Order screen<br />
<strong>Process</strong>ing Options<br />
Remove Check from Test Run<br />
(Execute)<br />
(Details Lists)<br />
System Menu: Environment → Report<br />
Choose report Orders: Actual/Plan/Variance<br />
(Choose)<br />
(Back)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 117 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Unit 16: Quality Management<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 118 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 88: Create Material Master Quality View<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
From the already created material master views we will add the quality management view to your<br />
BIKEC _ _ _ material master. This will define how and where we will run quality tests on the material.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Planning → Logistics Master Data →<br />
Material → Create<br />
Material BIKEC_ _ _<br />
Material Type Finished Product<br />
<br />
Deselect all the views<br />
Select Quality Management<br />
<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Continue)<br />
General data<br />
<br />
<br />
InspType Select (Possible entries (F4))<br />
Select by double-clicking on 04 (Goods receipt inspection from production)<br />
Select Active<br />
Insp. type select (Detail)<br />
Detailed information on inspection type<br />
Select Post to inspection stock<br />
De-select Insp. with task list<br />
De-select Automatic assignment<br />
De-select Check Chars.<br />
Select 100% inspection<br />
Select Skips allowed<br />
De-select Automatic UD<br />
De-Select Serial number poss<br />
(Make sure all other check boxes are blank or de-selected)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 119 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Q-score procedure From usage decision code<br />
(Continue)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 120 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 89: Maintain Plant Settings for Quality<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
At the organizational/plant level we can define how quality is going to be maintained and executed.<br />
These factors are how inspection lots are maintained, how results are recorded, quality completions,<br />
and basic data.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project →<br />
Quality Management → Basic Settings → Maintain Settings at Plant Level<br />
Select plant 0001<br />
(Copy As…)<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Copy)<br />
Select your Plant<br />
(Details)<br />
InsLot completion Tab<br />
Stor.loc. for reserves 20 (Quality)<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 121 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 90: Display Stock/Requirements List<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The Stock/requirements list is a dynamic list. It will change whenever a transaction occurs.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information<br />
Logistics → Production → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Requirements List<br />
Individual access Tab<br />
Material BIKEC_ _ _<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
You can display the other components that are in your BOM by selecting a planned order and clicking on<br />
the icon.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 122 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 91: Run Master Production Schedule<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
Allow the system to plan the availability and requirements for all the finished goods and components.<br />
By selecting the process MRP material box the system will not only be calculating the requirements for<br />
the finished goods, but also for the component (MRP) material.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Production → Production Planning → MPS → MPS →<br />
Total Planning → Online<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
MRP control parameters<br />
<strong>Process</strong>ing key NETCH<br />
Create purchase req. 2<br />
Schedule lines 3<br />
Create MRP list 1<br />
Planning mode 1<br />
Scheduling 1<br />
<strong>Process</strong> MRP materials Select<br />
(Enter) A warning message appears stating “Please check input parameters”<br />
(Enter) again to confirm and bypass the warning message<br />
To start the planning run, press continue<br />
Record materials planned<br />
Materials Comments<br />
(Exit)<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 123 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 92: Display Stock/Requirements List<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The Stock/requirements list is a dynamic list. It will change whenever a transaction occurs.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information<br />
Logistics → Production → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Requirements List<br />
Individual access Tab<br />
Material BIKEC_ _ _<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
You can display the other components that are in your BOM by selecting a planned order and clicking on<br />
the icon.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 124 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 93: Convert Planned Order to Production Order<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The MRP run has created production recommendations to supply the MPS demand created when MPS<br />
was run. The stock requirements list displays the suggested planned orders from the MPS run and will<br />
satisfy it by converting the planned order on the stock/requirements list to a production order.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information<br />
Logistics → Production → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Requirements List<br />
Individual access Tab<br />
Material BIKEC_ _ _<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
(Enter)<br />
Double click on the Planned Order to be converted.<br />
Click on the button<br />
Notice the release is automatically carried out.<br />
Change Total Qty add 10 to existing (record number ________)<br />
Accept all other default information<br />
Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Select the button to refresh the Stock/Requirements List from the previous exercise<br />
Notice the MRP elements change from the old PldOrd to display the new PrdOrd.<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 125 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 94: Goods Issue to Production Order<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
Goods being issues to the production order consumes them from inventory. The BOM defined the<br />
standard what should be used to make the finished goods times the quantity being made. This is the<br />
standard and barring any production changes, what is going to be consumed in the making of the<br />
finished goods. Once issued the costs of the material are assumed by the production order and the<br />
raw material inventory is decremented.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Goods Movements →<br />
Goods Issue<br />
Posting Date Today<br />
Defaults for Document Items<br />
Movement Type 261 (goods issue to consumption for order from warehouse)<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Storage Location 30 (Raw Material Inv)<br />
Click on the reference button.<br />
Enter your Production Order number<br />
Click on the button.<br />
Click on the button to accept the details for each material.<br />
Review the Goods Issue Sheet<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 126 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 95: Enter Completion Confirmation for Production<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This step tells the system the actual quantity of finished product that was produced and changes the<br />
status of the order costing can occur. The quantity produced can then be moved into inventory in a<br />
later step.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistic → Production → Shop Floor Control → Confirmation → Enter →<br />
For Order<br />
Enter your Production Order number.<br />
(Enter)<br />
Confirmation Type<br />
Click on final confirmation.<br />
Actual Data<br />
Yield to conf. (Number recorded in EX 93)<br />
Execution start change to 1 hour earlier than default time<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 127 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 96: Goods Receipt for Production Order<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
Move the new finished product from the production line into inventory. T<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Goods Movements →<br />
Goods Receipt<br />
Defaults for Document Items<br />
Movement Type 101 (Order to warehouse)<br />
Order Production Order number<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Storage Location 10 (Inventory)<br />
Select<br />
Click on the button to accept the details for the new pens received from production.<br />
Review your Goods Receipt Document.<br />
(Post)<br />
System Menu: Environment→ Stock Overview→ Stock Material<br />
Database selections<br />
Material BIKEC_ _ _<br />
Plant: P_ _ _<br />
Storage location 10 (Inventory)<br />
(Execute)<br />
Note the goods were received into Quality Inspection.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 128 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 97: Record Usage Decision<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The material just produced is in quarantine in inventory (quality location). To release the materials an<br />
inspection has to be conducted and based upon that inspection a decision what to do with the<br />
materials. If the material passes inspection, it will be released into unrestricted stock inventory. If the<br />
material fails inspection, a decision has to be made on what to do with it: rework, disposition, retest or<br />
another fate dBikeCding upon company procedure.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Inspection Lot →<br />
Usage Decision → Record<br />
Inspection Lot 4000000#### (Search by your Production Order #)<br />
(Enter)<br />
Defects Tab<br />
Usage decision<br />
UD code A0 01 Acceptance (Automatic Stock Posting)<br />
(Enter)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 129 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 98: Check Stock Status<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to obtain current inventory information about your products.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Materials Management →Inventory Management → Environment →<br />
Stock → Stock Overview<br />
Database selections<br />
Material BIKEC_ _ _<br />
Plant P_ _ _<br />
Storage location 10<br />
(Execute)<br />
Note the goods should have transferred from Quality Inspection to Unrestricted use.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 130 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 99: Settle Costs of Production Order<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise updates the cost of the production order. This includes labor, material, setup time, and if<br />
applicable, machine time.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Period-End Closing →<br />
Settlement → Individual <strong>Process</strong>ing<br />
Controlling Area C_ _ _ (If required)<br />
Order Production Order number<br />
Parameters<br />
Settlement period Current month<br />
Posting period Current month<br />
(Execute)<br />
(Details lists)<br />
System Menu: Environment → Report<br />
Choose report Orders: Actual/Plan/Variance<br />
(Choose)<br />
Review report<br />
(Back) to the Actual Settlement: Order screen<br />
<strong>Process</strong>ing Options<br />
Remove Check from Test Run<br />
(Execute)<br />
(Details Lists)<br />
System Menu: Environment → Report<br />
Choose report Orders: Actual/Plan/Variance<br />
(Choose)<br />
(Back)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 131 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Unit 17: Comprehensive Test – Starting with Sales<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 132 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 100: Create Sales Order<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you create a sales order.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create<br />
Order Type OR<br />
Organizational Data<br />
Sales Organization S_ _ _<br />
Distribution Channel RE<br />
Division 01<br />
(Enter)<br />
Sold-to party Customer # for SAP, America<br />
PO Number (any number)<br />
PO date today’s date<br />
Sales Tab<br />
Req. deliv. date 3 days from today<br />
Enter the following:<br />
Material Order Quantity<br />
BIKEC_ _ 10<br />
(Enter)<br />
Review the ATP screen for BIKEC_ _ _ (if applicable)<br />
(Enter) on either option (if applicable)<br />
System Menu: Goto → Header → Sales<br />
Conditions Tab<br />
Note and record the Net value for the order – this is the total of all line items $ _______________<br />
(Back)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 133 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 101: Create Delivery<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to create a delivery based on the customer’s order. Creating the<br />
delivery brings your order to the point where stock availability is re-determined, and the quantity of<br />
ordered items are moved to a scheduled for delivery stock status.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →<br />
Outbound Delivery → Create → Single Document →<br />
With Reference to Sales Order<br />
Shipping point S_ _ _<br />
Sales order data<br />
Selection date 7 days from today<br />
Order Standard Order number from previous exercise<br />
(Enter)<br />
The system defaults the items and quantities from the sales order that are scheduled to be delivered.<br />
Item Overview Tab<br />
Click on the line item 10<br />
(Item Details)<br />
(Back)<br />
Picking Tab<br />
Plnt P_ _ _<br />
SLoc 10 (Inventory)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 134 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 102: Pick Materials on Delivery Note<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The purpose of this exercise is to pick the materials. The delivery note indicates the quantity of the<br />
proposed materials per delivery.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →<br />
Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document<br />
Outbound Delivery Delivery note number from the previous exercise.<br />
(Enter)<br />
Picking Tab<br />
The material delivery quantity is proposed. You want to pick the correct amount to be delivered to the<br />
customer; therefore you will pick from the shelf the amount the system identifies for delivery.<br />
Picked Qty = Deliv. Qty<br />
(Save)<br />
Recheck the stock status of the materials. Note that no change has occurred in the stock status - the<br />
quantities are still in the “Schd. for delivery” stock type field.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 135 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 103: Post Goods Issue<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you post goods issue. Post goods issue reduces unrestricted stock to reflect<br />
the inventory shipped. This is the time at which the ownership of the goods changes from you to the<br />
customer. These goods have left your plant and are now owned by your customer. Both inventory and<br />
costs of goods sold are impacted by this transaction.<br />
If you have shipped or sold the goods FOB Destination, the actual change of ownership takes place at<br />
the time the goods are received at the customer’s location. However, the system reflects the materials<br />
are no longer available in your stock at the time of post good issue.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →<br />
Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document<br />
Outbound Delivery Delivery note number from the previous exercise.<br />
Select<br />
The system returns a message indicating change to the delivery note.<br />
Check the stock status of the materials.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 136 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 104: Create Billing for Customer<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will create the billing document for the customer. It is at this time when the revenue is<br />
recognized and posted to the general ledger. Once the post goods issue has been completed, you can<br />
bill your customer for those goods.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing Document → Create<br />
Document Delivery Document should default in<br />
(Execute)<br />
An invoice is displayed with the customer and materials from the delivery note along with the Net<br />
value (Amount Billed) and the cost of the order.<br />
Record the total amount billed to the customer. $ _____________________<br />
(Save)<br />
The billing document number is displayed at the bottom of the screen.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 137 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 105: Post Receipt of Customer Payment<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
The customer has received our invoice and has issued payment. We post the incoming payment to the<br />
customer's account.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable →<br />
Document Entry → Incoming Payment<br />
Document Date Today’s date<br />
Company Code C_ _ _<br />
Currency/Rate USD<br />
Bank data<br />
Account Your Bank Account<br />
Amount Enter the amount of the payment<br />
Open item selection<br />
Account: Customer # for SAP America<br />
Select<br />
Double click on the USD Gross amount of the Invoice you wish to make payment against.<br />
Note: The “not assigned” amount should be 0.00 after you select the invoice.<br />
(Post)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 138 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 106: Review Document Flow<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
SAP allows us to see a whole transaction from beginning to end. For instance, we have created an<br />
order with reference to a quotation, then a delivery, post goods issue and billing. To examine the flow,<br />
any one of those document numbers can be referenced, and the document flow will display an audit<br />
trail of all documents evolved.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Display<br />
Order Your Sales Order Number<br />
System Menu: Environment → Display document flow<br />
The system displays a list of documents associated with the quotation.<br />
Click on the line of the “GD goods issue: delvy ##”,<br />
Select<br />
The system displays the material document with a goods movement “601”, which is the movement type<br />
for goods issue to a delivery note (PGI).<br />
Select to view the account postings for this goods movement.<br />
(Back)<br />
From the Document Flow you can see the following:<br />
1. The entire document flow is now shown.<br />
2. There are no open documents.<br />
3. The business cycle is complete.<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 139 The Rushmore Group, LLC
Exercise 107: Create Sales Order<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
This exercise will have you create a sales order.<br />
Navigation<br />
Menu Path<br />
Trans Code<br />
Enter the following information:<br />
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create<br />
Order Type OR<br />
Organizational Data<br />
Sales Organization _ _ _<br />
Distribution Channel WH<br />
Division 01<br />
(Enter)<br />
Sold-to party Customer # for Promotional Products<br />
PO Number (any number)<br />
PO date Today’s date<br />
Sales TAB:<br />
Req. deliv. date Enter date 1 day from today<br />
Enter the following:<br />
Material Order Quantity<br />
BIKEC_ _ _ 25<br />
(Enter)<br />
Review the Availability Control screen for BIKEC_ _ _<br />
Select Complete Delivery<br />
Review Credit Limit Message – Select (Continue) to acknowledge the message.<br />
System Menu: Goto → Header → Sales<br />
Conditions TAB:<br />
Note and record the net value for the order – this is the total of all line items $____________________<br />
(Back)<br />
(Save)<br />
Record the system message:<br />
Message<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 140 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION II – (BPI – II)<br />
Exercise 108: Complete All Activities to Satisfy the Order-to-Cash<br />
<strong>Business</strong> Cycle<br />
Purpose of Exercise<br />
To have you complete all processes necessary to receive payment for delivered goods to Promotional<br />
Products.<br />
This will include:<br />
Complete the Order-to-Cash business process cycle<br />
This will include the:<br />
Purchasing (the complete Procure-to-Pay business process cycle)<br />
Production (the complete Make-to-Stock business process cycle)<br />
MPS/MRP planning and execution for Finished Goods and Raw Material<br />
Version 4.1 – Release July 2007 Page 141 The Rushmore Group, LLC